HP 345561-001 Startup And Reference Manual
Star tup an d Ref erence G uide HP Notebook Ser i es Doc ument P art Number: 3 4 5 5 61-001 Septe mber 200 3 Part 1: Startup The Startup part of this guide explains ho w to set up your notebook for the f irst time. Part 2: Reference The Reference part of this guide explains ho w to identify and use the hardware and softw are features on your notebook. 345561-001.book Page i Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Cont ent s 1S t a r t u p 2 Hardware 3 Keyboard 4P o w e r 5 Drives and Drive Media 6 Multimedia 7 Communications 8 Hardware Options and Upgrades 9 Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities A Specifications Index 345561-001.book Page ii M o nd ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â1 Pa r t - 1 Star tup This Startup and Refer ence Guide provides information about setting up and using your notebook. â T o set up your notebook hardw are and software for the f irst time, follo w the procedures in this âStartupâ part. â T o learn more about using your notebook, refer to the remaining âReferenceâ part of this book. T o f ind information about a specif ic topic: â Refer to the chapter Contents on the f irst page of each chapter , or â Refer to the Index. The illustrations throughout this book sho w the features and procedures for se veral notebook models. Whene v er more than one notebook is illustrated, refer only to the illustration(s) for your notebook model. 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP art 1 Startup Set ting Up the Hard w ar e T o set up the notebook for the f irst time, you need the notebook, the A C adapter 1 , the po wer cord 2 , and the battery pack 3 . During hardware setup, you will: â Insert the battery pack into the notebook, so the battery can begin to char ge as soon as the notebook is connected to ext e rn a l p owe r . â Open the notebook. â Connect the notebook to external po wer and turn on the notebook. Y ou will then proceed to software setup. Identify ing the A C adapt er , the po w er cor d , and the bat tery pac k (P o w er cords v ary by r egion and coun tr y .) 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â3 Inser ting a B a t ter y P ac k T o insert the battery pack into the battery bay: 1. T urn the notebook underside up on a flat surf ace. 2. Insert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook 1 . 3. T ilt the battery pack do wnward until it snaps into place 2 . Inserting a battery pack à CAUT ION: T o ensur e that the cor r ect dr iv ers load and t o pre v ent f ile corr uption or damage t o components , do not re mov e the battery pack until the notebook ha s been co nnected t o exte rnal A C po w er . 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP art 1 Startup Openin g t he Notebook T o open the notebook: 1. Place the notebook display side up on a flat surface near an electrical outlet. 2. Slide the display release latch 1 as you raise the display 2 . Opening the notebook 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â5 Conn ec ting t he N otebook to External P o w er T o connect the notebook to e xternal A C po wer: 1. Plug the A C adapter cable into the po wer connector 1 . 2. Plug the po wer cord into the A C adapter 2 , then into an electrical outlet 3 . When the notebook is recei ving external po wer , the battery light 4 turns on. Co nnecting the notebook t o ext ernal po w er (P o w er cor ds and outlets var y by r egion and countr y .) 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP art 1 Startup Cha r g i ng a N e w Batt ery P a ck The battery pack you inserted earli er begins to char ge as soon as the notebook is connected to extern al po wer . Char ge status is indicated by the battery light. â The battery light is on and orang e while a battery pack inserted into the notebook is charging. â The battery light is on and gr een when a battery pack inserted into the notebook is fully char ged. HP recommends that you lea ve the notebook connected to external po wer until the battery pack is fully char ged and the battery light turns green. (A partially charged ne w battery pack can run the notebook after initial software setup is complete, b ut battery charge displays will not be accurate until the ne w battery pack has been fully charged.) Identify ing the battery light 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â7 T urnin g On t h e Notebook T o turn on the notebook, press the po wer b utton 1 . When the notebook turns on, the po wer/standby light 2 turns on, and you are prompted to begin softw are setup. T urning on the notebook If the notebook does not turn on: â Make sure that the A C adapter is securely plugged into an electrical outlet. â Make sure that the outlet is pro viding po wer . (T o conf irm that the outlet is providing po wer , plug another device into the outlet.) â If you ha ve installed a battery pack, make sure that the battery pack is f irmly seated. â Refer to the W orldwide T elephone Numbers booklet (English only) included with the notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center . 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 1 Startup Setting Up th e Softw ar e à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t file co rru ption and ensur e that the cor rec t dri v ers ar e installed , install so ft w are onl y w hen the notebook is connect ed to e xternal po w er thr ough the A C ada pter . During the inst allation: â Do not unplug the n otebook fr om e xter nal po wer . â Do not sh ut dow n the notebook or initi ate Standb y or Hiber nation . â Do not inse r t , r emov e , connect , or disconnec t any de v ice , cable , or cord . Installin g B asi c Soft war e When the notebook is connected to external po wer and turned on for the f irst time, a prompt to set up the operating system and other basic software is displayed on the screen. Before responding to the prompt and proceeding through the on-screen instructions, read the follo wing caution and other installation information. â After beginning the softw are setup, you must complete the entire process without interruption. Setup time v aries. â If you are prompted to select a language, choose carefully . On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and ca nnot be restored during the installation. â Regional settings and most other preferences that you may select as you set up the basic software can be selected or changed later , after the operating system is installed. â When you are prompted to accept the End User License Agreement, you must choose Accept to continue the software setup. â During setup, it is normal for so me notebook models to pause occasionally for up to 2 minutes and to restart se veral times. These pauses and restarts occur on ly during initial software setup. They will not occur during standard W indo ws startups. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â9 Installin g O ptional Sof t w are Step-by-step instructions for installing and using man y of the applications and utilities included with the notebook are provided later in this guide. If you prefer to install optional software no w , the follo wing information may be helpful. T o install an application or a utility from a CD, refer to the instructions included with the CD . If printed instructions are not included in the CD package, they may be displayed on the screen when the CD is inserted. T o vie w or install preloaded utilities or applications, select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. Then: â T o display the descriptions and space requirements of a preloaded item without installing it, select the Next b utton, then select an item. After vie wing the information that is displayed, select the Cancel b utton. â T o install a preloaded item, select the check box for the item, select the Next b utton, then follo w the instructions on the screen. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup Set ting Region al and Dis pl a y Prefer ences K eyboard language and other re gional preferences, such as time, date, and currency format, are set in the Re gional Options windo w of the operating system. T o access the Regional Options windo w , select Start > Control Panel > Date, T ime, Language and Regional Options icon. Screen appearance settings are accessed from the operating system Appearance and Themes windo w . T o access the Appearance and Themes windo w , select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes icon. T o access the settings that control the size of the items displayed on the screen, select the Change Resolution task. T urning O f f t he Notebook T urn of f the notebook b y using the W indo ws shutdo wn procedure: Select Start > T urn Of f Computer > T urn Off. If the notebook does not respond, try the follo wing emergenc y shutdo wn procedures in the sequence provided: â If the notebook is running Microsoft W indo ws XP Professional: press ctrl alt delete. Select the Shut Do wn b utton, then select Shut down from the drop do wn list. â Press and hold do wn the po wer button for at least 4 seconds. â Unplug the notebook from external po wer and remo ve the battery pack. For instructions see âReplacing a Battery P ackâ in Chapter 4. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â11 Setting Up a W ir eless De vice Y our notebook model may ha ve a Bluetooth de vice, a wireless LAN de vice, or no wireless de vices. T o display the names of any preinstalled wireless LAN de vices in De vice Manager: Select Start > My Computer . Right-click on the My Computer windo w , then select Properties > Hardware tab > De vice Manager > Network Adapters. Using t he Wireless De vice Ligh t and Bu t ton The wireless de vice light 1 av ailable on select models indicates whether integrated wireless de vices ha ve been turned on or of f with the wireless de vice button 2 . The inte grated wireless de vices may include a Bluetooth de vice, another wireless de vice, or both wireless de vices. An inte grated wireless de vice must be turned on with the wireless de vi ce button before the wireless de vice can be set up. Identify ing the w ir eles s dev i ce light and button 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup â When the wireless de vice button is turned on, the wireless de vice light turns on and the integrated wireless de vices are hardware enabled. â When the wireless de vice button is turned of f, the wireless de vice light turns of f and the integrated wireless de vices are hardware disabled. The light remains on if either or both wireless de vices are turned of f by using the de vice softwa re rather than by using the wireless de vice button. Set ting U p a Bluetoot h De vice T o set up a Bluetooth de vice, install the Bluetooth software preloaded on your notebook: 1. T o enable the Bluetooth de vice and the software setup, press the wireless de vice button. (The wireless de vice light turns on.) 2. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. Select the Bluetooth software, then follo w the setup instructions on the screen. For more conf iguration information and usage instructions, refer on the Documentation LibraryâBluetooth CD included with your notebook to the Bluetooth Getting Started guide and to the Bluetooth Userâ s Guide . Set ting Up a Wir eless De vice T o set up an Integrated W ireless LAN 54g Network Adapter , follo w the instructions at the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com for do wnloading and installing the SoftPaq for the Inte grated W ireless LAN 54g Netw ork Adapter . F or general information about accessing, do wnloading, and installing a SoftPaq, see Chapter 9, in section âUpdating Software. â T o set up any other wireless de vice, you may use the HP setup and conf iguration utility preloaded on your notebook or the default W indows XP wireless netw ork connection utility . 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â13 The HP setup and conf iguration utility supports legac y operating systems and Cisco Compatible Extension program features. The Cisco Compatible Extensions program for WLAN de vices assures compatibility between Cisco Aironet WLAN products and certain notebook models through extensi v e independent testing. Because a Cisco Compat ible wireless de vice is IEEE 802.11 compliant and W iFi certif ied, it is fully compatible with other W iFi certif ied products. For optimal wireless de vice functionality , HP recommends that you set up the de vice using the HP setup and configuration utility . â T o set up a wireless LAN de vice using the default W indo ws XP wireless network connection utility: 1. Press the wireless de vice button. (The wireless de vice light turns on.) 2. Follo w the instructions a v ailable through Start > W indo ws Help and Support. â T o set up a wireless LAN de vice using the HP setup and conf iguration utility , you must first disable the W indows XP wireless network connection utility , then install the HP setup and conf iguration utility . 1. T o disable the W indo ws XP wireless network connection utility: a. Select Start > Control P anel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections. b . Right-click W ireless Netw ork Connection, then select Properties. c. On the W ireless Netw orks tab, clear the Use W indo ws to conf igure my wireless network settings check box. d. Select OK. The W indo ws XP wireless network connection utility remains disabled until you enable it again. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup 2. Press the wireless de vice button. (The wireless de vice light turns on.) 3. T o install the HP setup and conf iguration utility: Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup > WLAN Utility Installer , then select OK. 4. T o install and conf igure your wireless device, follo w the installation and conf iguration instructions on the screen. Accessing Ins truc tions f or Usin g a Wir eles s De vice Instructions for installing and using an Integrated W ireless LAN 54g Network Adapter are included with the Inte grated W ireless LAN 54g Network Adapter SoftP aq av ailable at the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com. Instructions for any other inte grated wireless de vice included with your model are provided with your notebook. Depending on the wireless de vice, the instructions may be provided in a Help f ile within the device softw are or in documentation included with your notebook. Protectin g t he N otebook from Po w e r S u r g e s T o protect the notebook from the po wer surges that may be caused by an uncertain po wer supply or an electrical storm: â Plug the notebook po wer cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector . Surge protectors are a v ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. â Provide sur ge protection on the cable that connects a modem to the telephone line. â During an electrical storm, run the notebook on battery po wer or shut do wn the notebook and disconnect the po wer cord. 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â15 Protectin g t he N otebook Agains t Vir us e s When you use the notebook for email, network, or Internet access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, your applications, or your utilities or cause them to function abnormally . Anti virus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair damage they ha v e caused. T o provide protection against ne wly discov ered viruses, anti virus software must be updated. The Norton AntiV irus 2003 software installed on your notebook provides 60 days of free virus updates. For Norton AntiV irus 2003 instructions and more information about virus updates, refer to the Help f ile within the application or select Start > Help and Support. 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup Using t h e Notebook Sa f ely This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital de vice, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. For more safety and re gulatory information refer to the Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide on the Documentation Library CD and to the printed W ir eless Device Re gulatory Notices document included with your notebook. The Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide also includes information about protecting the notebook against electrostatic dischar ge. Ã W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of electr i c shock or damage to y our equipment: â P lug the po wer cor d into an electr ic al outlet that is easily acce ssible at all times . â Disconnect po w er fr om the pr oduct b y unplugging the po w er cor d fr om the e lectr ical outle t. â If pr o vi ded with a thr ee -conductor po w er cor d w ith a three-pin attachment plug , plug the cor d into a gr ounded (earthed) outlet. Do not disable the po we r cor d gro unding pin. T he gr ounding pi n is an important saf ety featur e . Ã W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of s eri ous inj ury , read the Safety & Comf ort Guide . It desc r ibes pr oper w orks tation s etup and pr oper pos tur e , health, and w or k habits f or computer us ers. T he Saf ety & Comf ort Guide also pr o vi des important elec tri cal and mechani cal safety inf ormatio n. T his guide is a vailable on the W e b at http://www .hp.com/ergo, on the har d dr iv e , or on the Doc umentati on Libr ary CD that is included w ith the pr oduct . Ã W ARNIN G: T his notebook is designed to r un demanding applicati ons at full po w er . As a result o f incr eased po w er consumpti on, it is nor mal fo r the notebook to feel w arm or hot w hen used continuo usly . T o a vo id potenti al discomfort or burns , do not bloc k the air ve nts or use the notebook on y our lap f or e xtended per iods. T he notebook compli es w ith the user -acce ssible surface tem peratur e limits de fined b y the Inter national S tandard f or Saf ety of Infor mation T echno logy E quipmen t (IE C 60 9 5 0) . 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 Pa r t 2 Re fe re n ce 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef ere nce GuideâP ar t 2 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â1 2 Ha r d w a r e Cont ents Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Keys and Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6 Audio Buttons and Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â8 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â9 Connectors and Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â9 Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â10 Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â11 Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â12 Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â13 Bays and Memory Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â13 Docking Connector and Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â14 Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â15 Additional Standard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â16 Cables and Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â16 Adapters and Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â17 Restoration and Documentation CDs . . . . . . . . . . . 2â18 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Disp l a y Displa y Displa y release latch Opens the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â3 To p To u c h Pa d To p : To u c h P a d 1 T ouchP ad on/off button Enables/disab les the T ouchP ad. 2 T ouchP ad* Mov es the pointer and selects or activ ates items on the screen. 3 T ouchP ad light On: T ouchP ad is enabled. 4 T ouchP ad scroll zones (2)* Scroll upward or do wnward. 5 Left and right T ouchP ad but t on s * Function lik e the left and r ight buttons on an e xter nal mouse. *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf ormation about changing the functions of T ouchP ad f eatures, see âSetting T ouchP ad Preferencesâ in Chapter 3. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Keys a n d A n t e n n a T op: Ke ys and Antenna 1 Fn ke y Combines with other ke ys to perf or m system tasks. F or e xample, pressing Fn F7 increases screen brightness. 2 Function ke ys (12) P erf or m s ystem and application tasks. When combined with the Fn k ey , the function ke ys F1 and F3 through F12 perf or m additional tasks as hotke ys. 3 K e ypad ke ys (15) Can be used like the k e ys on an e xter nal numeric ke ypad. 4 Applications ke y Displa ys a shor tcut menu for items beneath the pointer . 5 Antenna (av ailab le on select models and not visible from outside the notebook)* Sends and receiv es wireless device signals. 6 Windows logo k ey Displa ys the Windows Star t menu. *The notebook has 2 antennas. The seco nd is on the right side of the notebook. F or optimal transmissions, k eep the areas immediately ov er the antennas free from obstructions. 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â5 Po w e r C o n t r o l s T op: P o wer Controls 1 P o wer b utton* When the notebook is: â Off , press to tur n on the notebook. â On, briefly press to initiate Hiber nation. â In Standb y , br iefly press to resume from Standb y . â In Hiber nation, briefly press to restore from Hiber nation. â If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. 2 Displa y s witch* â If the notebook is closed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the notebook is opened while in Standby , tur ns on the notebook (resumes from Standby). *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf ormation about changing the function of the pow er button or displa y s witch, see âSetting P owe r Control Pref erencesâ in Chapter 4. 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Ligh ts T op: Lights 1 Num lock light On (green): Num loc k or the inter nal ke ypad is on. 2 Caps loc k light On (green): Caps loc k is on. 3 Mute light On (orange): V olume is muted. 4 Wireless de vice light (a vailab le on select models) On: The wireless de vice button is tur ned on and an integrated wireless de vice is hardware enab led. 5 Batter y light On: The no tebook is receiving adequate e xter nal pow er . â On orange: A batter y pac k is charging. â On green: A batter y pac k is fully charged. â Flashing: A batter y pac k is malfunctioning and ma y need to be replaced. 6 IDE (Integrated Driv e Electronics) drive light On: The inter nal hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. 7 P o wer/standb y light On: Notebook is tur ned on. Flashing: Notebook is in Standby . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â7 Audio B ut tons an d Speak er s T op: A udio Buttons and Speakers 1 Increase v olume button Increases system vo lume. 2 Decrease v olume button Decreases system vo lume. 3 Mute button Mutes or restores v olume. 4 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Fron t P an e l Fr ont P anel 1 SD (Secure Digital) Card light On: An SD Card or MMC is being accessed. 2 SD Card slot Suppor ts SD Cards and MMCs (multimedia cards). 3 Microphone jack Connects an op tional monaural or stereo microphone. 4 A udio-out jack Connects optional headphones or pow ered stereo speakers . Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. 5 Wireless de vice button (av ailab le on select models) On: The wireless de vice light is on and an integrated wireless de vice is hardware enab led. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â9 Rea r P an e l Con nector s a nd Jacks Rear P anel: Connectors and Jac ks 1 Exter nal monitor connector Connects an optional V GA e xter nal monitor or projector . 2 S-Video jack Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 3 USB connectors (3) Connect optional 2.0-compliant USB de vices. 4 RJ-45 network jack Connects an Ethern et network cab le. (An Ether net network cable is included with select models.) 5 RJ-11 telephone jack Connects a modem cable . (A modem cab le is included with select models.) 6 P arallel connector (a v ailable on select models) Connects an optional parallel de vice such as a printer . 7 1394 connector Co nnects an optional 1394 device such as a camcorder . 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Ve n t Rear P anel: V ent Exhaust v ent* Provides airflow to cool internal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . *The notebook has 3 v ents. The other v ents are on the underside of the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â11 Left Si de Left Side 1 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. 2 PC Card eject button Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. 3 Optical drive* Suppor ts an optical disc. *The type of optical drive , fo r exampl e a CD , D VD , or combination CD/D VD drive , v ar ies by model. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Righ t Side Right Side 1 Antenna (av ailab le on select models and not visible from outside the notebook) * Sends and receiv es wireless device signals. 2 Infrared por t Provides wireless comm unication between the notebook and an optional IrD A-compliant de vice. 3 P o wer connector Connects an A C adapter cable . 4 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook. *The notebook has 2 antennas. The seco nd is on the left side of the notebook. F or optimal transmissions, k eep the areas immediately ov er the antennas free from obstructions. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â13 Under side Bay s and Mem or y Com par tmen t Underside: Ba ys and Memory Compar tment 1 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pack . 2 Batter y pack release latch Relea ses a batter y pac k from the batter y ba y . 3 Memor y compar tment Contains 1 memor y slot for an optional 128-MB, 256-MB , 512-MB , or 1024-MB memor y module. As shipped, the memor y slot ma y be filled with a replaceab le memor y module or v acant, depending on the notebook model. 4 Hard drive ba y Holds the inter nal hard dr iv e. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Doc king C onnec tor and V ents Underside: Doc king Connector and V ent 1 Dock ing connector* Connects t he notebook to an optional por t replicator . 2 V ents (3) Allow airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, use the notebook only on hard surf aces which cannot obstruct the vents . Do not allow a soft surf ace , such as bedding, clothing or a thick rug, to bloc k airflow . *As shipped, the docking co nnector is not visible . The docking connector is beneath the docking connector co ve r , which protects the connector when the connector is not in use. 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â15 Labels The labels af fix ed to the noteboo k and some notebook components provide information you may need when troubleshooting system problems or tra veling internationally with the notebook. â The Microsoft Certif icate of Authenticity label contains the Product K ey number . Y ou may need this number to update or troubleshoot the operating system. â The system label provides re gulatory information about the notebook. â The product identif ication label contains the serial number of the notebook and a code describing the original conf iguration of the notebook. Y ou will need the notebook serial number if you call customer support. â The modem approv als label, which is af f ixed to an optional internal modem, provides re gulatory information. â W ireless certif ication labels, which are specif ic to various types of optional wireless de vices, are af fix ed to the notebook and provide re gulatory information. 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Additional Stan dard C ompon ents The components included with the notebook v ary by re gion, country , notebook model, and the optional hardware ordered. The follo wing sections identify the standard external accessories and components included with most notebook models. Ca bl es and Cord Additional Standar d Components: Cables and Cor d 1 Modem cab le (included with select models) Connects a modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter . â A modem cable has a 6-pin, RJ-11 telephone connec tor at each end. 2 Network cable (included with select models) Connects the notebook to an Ether net network jack. â A network cable has an 8-pin, RJ-45 network connector at each end. 3 P o wer cord* Connects an A C adapter to an A C electr ical outlet. *P o wer cords v ar y in appear ance b y region and countr y . 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â17 Ada pters and Ba t ter y P ac k Additional Standar d Components: Adapters and Battery P ack 1 A C adapter Conv er ts A C pow er to DC power . 2 Countr y-specific modem adapter (included by region as required) Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack. 3 Japan-specific outlet adapter (Japan only) Connects the A C adapter to a 2-prong electrical outlet. 4 Batter y pack Runs the notebook when the notebook is not connected to e xter nal powe r . 345561-001.book Page 17 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â18 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Re s toration and Doc ume ntation CDs CDs for repairing or reinstalling software and for obtaining supplementary information about the notebook are included with the notebook. â For information about restoring, repairing, or reinstalling software, refer to Chapter 9, âSo ftw are Updates, Restorations and Utilities. â â For supplementary information about the notebook, refer to the Documentation Library CD. The Documentation Library CD included with all models includes the follo wing guides. Additional guidesâfor example, instruction manuals for using an optional Bluetooth de viceâare included with select models. For Info rmation About These T opics Select This Guide â Caring for the notebook and driv es â Preparing the notebook for transport â T rav eling with the notebook inter nationally Maintenance, Shipping and T rav el â Solving notebook problems y ourself â Getting help T roubleshooting â Gov ernmental and safety inf ormation â Protecting the notebook from static electricity Regulator y and Saf ety Notices Ergonomic and saf ety inf or mation Saf ety & Comf or t Guide General instructions f or using modem A T commands Modem Command Guidelines (Adv anced Users Only) A T commands suppor ted by an Agere modem. (An optional inter nal modem suppor ts the Agere command set.) Agere Command Set (Adv anced Users Only)* *A v ailable in English only . 345561-001.book Page 18 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â1 3 Key b o a r d Cont ents TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 Identifying TouchPad Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 Using the TouchPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â3 Setting TouchPad Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â3 Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â4 Identifying Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â4 Hotkey Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â5 Hotkey Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â6 Hotkey Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â6 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â9 Turning the Keypad On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â10 Switching the Functions of Keypad Keys . . . . . . . . 3â10 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d To u c h Pa d Id entifying T ouchP ad Com ponents The T ouchPad includes the follo wing components: Identify ing T o uchP ad components 1 T ouchPad 4 T ouchPad on/off b utton 2 Left and right T ouchP ad b uttons 5 T ouchPad light 3 T ouchP ad scroll zones (2) 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â3 Using t he T o uc hP ad The T ouchPad pro vides the na vigation, selection, and scroll functions of an optional external mouse. â T o mov e the pointer , slide your f inger across the T ouchPad surface in the direction you wa nt to mov e the pointer . â If the pointer continues to mov e after you lift your f inger from the T ouchPad surf ace, wait a fe w seconds and the pointer will stop moving. â T o ex ecute the click functions of the left or right b utton on an external mouse, press the left or right T ouchPad b utton. â T o scroll upward, press the icon in the upw ard scroll zone. T o scroll do wnward, press the icon in the do wnward scroll zone. â T o enable or disable the T ouchPad, press the T ouchP ad b utton. When the T ouchPad is enabled, the T ouchPad light is on. The notebook turns on with the T ouchPad enabled. Users who work with ke ystrokes rather than mouse actions may prefer to disable the T ouchPad to pre v ent accidental T ouchPad acti vity . Set ting T ouchP ad Prefer ences Pointer speed and shape, click speed, mouse trails, and other pointing de vice preferences are set in the operating system Mouse Properties windo w . T o access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardw are icon > Mouse icon. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d Hot k e y s Id entifying H otk e y s Hotke ys are preset combinations of the Fn key 1 and one of the function ke ys 2 . The icons on the function ke ys F1 and F3 through F12 represent the hotke y functions av ailable on the notebook. Identif y in g hotk ey s 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â5 Hot k e y Qu ic k R ef er enc e The follo wing table identifies the def ault hotkey functions. F or information about changing the function of the Fn F5 hotke ys, see the âSetting Po wer Control Preferencesâ section in Chapter 4. Default Function Hotkeys Open Help and Suppor t window . Fn F1 Open Microsoft Inter net Explorer . Fn F3 Switch displa y and image. Fn F4 Initiate Standb y . Fn F5 Initiate QuickLoc k. Fn F6 Decrease displa y br ightness. Fn F7 Increase displa y br ightness. Fn F8 Pla y , pause, or resume an audio CD or D VD . Fn F9 Stop an audio CD or D VD . Fn F10 Pla y the pre vious track or chapter on an audio CD o r DV D. Fn F11 Pla y the next tr ack on an audio CD or D VD . Fn F12 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d Hot k e y Pr oce dur e s T o use a hotke ys command on the notebook ke yboard, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Briefly press the Fn ke y , then briefly press the second ke y of the hotke ys command. â Press and hold do wn the Fn ke y , briefly press the second ke y of the hotke ys command, then release both ke ys at the same time. Hotk e y C ommands Open H elp and Sup port Window (Fn F1 ) The Fn F1 hotke ys open the Help and Support window . From the Help and Support windo w you can access general information about your notebook, links to software updates and online technical support specialists, and other support features. For more information about the Help and Support windo w , see the âUsing the Help and Support W indo wâ section in Chapter 9, âSoftware Updates, Restorations and Utilities. â Open In ternet Explorer (Fn F3 ) The Fn F3 hotke ys open Internet Explorer . After you ha v e set up your Internet or network services and your Internet Explorer home page, you can use the Fn F3 hotke ys for quick access to your home page and the Internet. S witch Im ag e (Fn F4 ) The Fn F4 hotke ys switch the image among display devices connected to the external monitor connector or the S-V ideo jack on the notebook. For e xample, if an external monitor is connected to the notebook, pressing the Fn F4 hotke ys switches the image among the notebook display , the external monitor display , and a simultaneous display on both the notebook and the monitor . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â7 Initia te Standb y (Fn F5 ) The Fn F5 hotke ys are set by default to initiate Standb y . Standby can be initiated only while the notebook is on. If the notebook is in Hibernation, you must restore from Hibernation before you can initiate Standby . T o restore from Hibernation or resume from Standby , briefly press the po wer button. F or more information about using Standby and Hibernation, refer to Chapter 4, âPo wer . â For information about changing the function of the Fn F5 hotk eys, refer in Chapter 4 to the âSetting Po wer Control Preferencesâ section. Initia te Q uic kLoc k (Fn F6) The Fn F6 hotke ys initiate the operating system QuickLock security feature. The QuickLock feature disables the ke yboard and displays the log on screen. QuickLock does not disable the T ouchPad. Before you can use the QuickLock feature, you must set a W indo ws system password. F or instructions, refer to your operating system documentation. After you ha ve set a W indo ws system passw ord: â T o initiate QuickLock, press Fn F6. â T o exit QuickLock, enter your W indows system passw ord. Dec rease Bri ghtness (Fn F7) The Fn F7 hotke ys decrease notebook screen brightness. Inc rease Bri ghtn ess (Fn F8) The Fn F8 hotke ys increase notebook screen brightness. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d P l a y , P aus e, or Resume an Audio CD or D VD (Fn F9) The Fn F9 hotke ys function only when an audio CD or D VD is inserted. If the audio CD or D VD is â Not playing, press the Fn F9 hotke ys to begin or resume the play . â Playing, press the Fn F9 hotke ys to pause the play . Stop an Audio CD or D VD (Fn F1 0) The Fn F10 hotke ys stop the play of an audio CD or D VD that is playing. P l a y Pre v ious T rack of an Audio CD or D VD (Fn F1 1 ) The Fn F11 hotke ys play the previously played track of an audio CD or D VD that is playing. P lay Ne x t T rack of an Au dio CD or D VD (Fn F1 2) The Fn F12 hotke ys play the next track of an audio CD or D V D that is playing. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â9 Key p a d The ke ypad consists of 15 ke ys that can be used like the ke ys on an external k eypad. When the k eypad is turned on, each k eypad ke y performs the functions indicated by the icon in the upper right corner of the ke y . Identify ing the k e ypad k e y s 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Ke y b o a r d T urnin g th e K e ypad O n an d Of f When the ke ypad is of f, press Fn num lk 1 to turn the keypad on. When the ke ypad is on, press Fn num lk to turn the ke ypad of f. The num lock light 2 turns on when the ke ypad is on. Identify ing the Fn and num lk k e y s and the num loc k light S witching t h e Functions of K e ypad K e y s Y ou can temporarily switch the functions of a ke ypad key between its standard function and its ke ypad function. â T o use a ke y on the ke ypad as a ke ypad key while the k eypad is turned of f, press and hold Fn while pressing the ke y . â T o use a ke y on the ke ypad as a standard key while the ke ypad is turned on: â Press and hold Fn to type with the ke y in lo wercase. â Press and hold Fn shift to type with the ke y in uppercase. Releasing the Fn ke y returns a ke ypad key to its set function. F or example, a k eypad k ey returns to its ke ypad function if the ke ypad is turned on or to its standard function if the ke ypad is turned of f. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â1 4 Po w e r Cont ents Understanding Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown . . . . 4â2 Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â3 Choosing Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown . . . . . . . . . 4â4 Using Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 Identifying Power Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4â5 Turning the Notebook or Display On or Off . . . . . . . 4â6 Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . . 4â6 Initiating or Resuming from Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7 Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . 4â8 Setting Power Control Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â9 Using Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â10 Identifying the Battery and Power/Standby Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â10 Switching Between Battery and External Power . . . 4â11 Charging a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â11 Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . 4â12 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â13 Calibrating a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â14 Storing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â16 Battery Conservation Settings and Procedures . . . . 4â17 Replacing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â18 Recycling or Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . . . . . . 4â19 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r Un derstan ding Stan db y , Hibern ation and Shu tdo wn This section describes Standby , Hibernation, and shutdo wn and explains when to implement them. Standb y , Hibernation, and shutdo wn procedures are provided later in the chapter . Standby and Hibernation are energ y-saving features that can be initiated by you or b y the system. Standb y Standby reduces po wer to system components that are not in use. When Standby is initiated, your w ork is sav ed in random access memory (RAM) and the screen is cleared. â Sa ving your work before initia ting Standby is not usually necessary , b ut is a recommended precaution. â When the notebook is in Standby , the po wer/standby light flashes. When you resume from Standby , your work returns to the screen where you left of f. Hib e rn ati on Hibernation sa ves system memory to the hard dri ve, tak es a snapshot of the notebook image, then shuts do wn the notebook. When you resume from Hibernation, your work returns to the screen exactly as you left it. The follo wing information may be useful as you manage Hibernation: â Sa ving your work before initiating Hibernation is not usually necessary , b ut is a recommended precaution. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â3 â T o determine whether the notebook is in Hibernation or turned of f, press the po wer button: â If the notebook is in Hibernation, your work returns to the screen. â If the notebook is of f, W indo ws loads. â Hibernation is enabled by def a ult, but can be disabled. T o pre vent loss of w ork during a critical low-battery condition, disable Hibernation only during a battery pack calibration. T o verify that Hibernation is enabled, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Po wer Options icon > Hibernate tab . If Hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected. Ã CAUT ION: If the config urati on of the not ebook sy stem is c hanged dur ing Hiber nation , it may not be po ssible to r esume fr om Hibe rnation . When the notebook is in Hiber nation: â Do not add or r emo v e a memory module. â Do not connec t or disconnect an e xter nal dev ice . â Do not inse r t or r emo ve a CD , D VD , P C Car d , SD Car d, or MMC . Shu tdo w n Shutdo wn procedures turn of f the notebook. Whether to leav e a battery pack in the notebook or in storage depends on ho w you work: â Lea ving the battery pack in the notebook enables the battery pack to char ge whenev er the notebook is connected to external po wer and also protects your w ork during a power outage. â A battery pack in the notebook dischar ges more quickly , ev en when the notebook is turned of f, than a battery pack that has been remov ed from the notebook and stored in a cool, dry location. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r C hoosin g Standb y , H ibern a tion or Shu tdo w n If you plan to r esume shortly: Initiate Standb y for shorter times and Hibernation for longer times or po wer conserv ation. The amount of time a battery pack can support Standby or Hibernation or hold a char ge varies b y notebook configuration and the condition of the battery pack. â Initiating Standby clears the screen, uses less po wer than lea ving the notebook on, and your work returns quickly to the screen when you resume from Standby . A fully charged ne w battery pack can typically support Standby for up to 48 hours. â Initiating Hibernation clears the screen and uses much less po wer than Standby . Returning to work sa ved in Hibernation takes longer than returning to w ork sav ed in Standby , but is faster than returning to your place manually after restarting the notebook. A fully char ged new battery pack can typically support Hibernation for se veral weeks. If you plan to r esume within 2 weeks: Shut do wn the notebook. If possible, connect the notebook to external po wer to k eep an inserted battery pack fully char ged. If the notebook will be disconnected fr om e xternal power for mor e than 2 weeks: T o extend the life of an inserted battery pack, shut do wn the notebook. Remov e the battery pack and store it in a cool, dry location. If an e xternal power supply is uncertain, for example, because of an electrical storm, sa ve your w ork, then initiate Hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â5 Using Stan db y , H iberna tion an d Shu tdo w n Procedures This section explains the def ault Standby , Hibernation, and shutdo wn procedures and includes information about turning the display on or of f. Id entifying P o w er C ontrols and Indica tors Standby , Hibernation, shutdo wn, and display procedures use the follo wing controls and indicators: Identify ing St andby , Hiber nation , shu tdo w n, and displa y contr ols and indicato rs 1 P o wer button 3 Fn F5 hotke ys (to initiate Standb y) 2 Displa y s witch 4 P o wer/standb y light 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r T urnin g th e Notebook or Dis p lay On or O ff Using Em ergen cy Shutdo wn Procedur es If the notebook does not respond to the W indo ws shutdo wn procedure (Start > T urn Of f Computer > T urn Off), try the follo wing emergenc y shutdo wn procedures in the sequence provided: â If the notebook is running W indo ws XP Professional: Press ctrl alt delete. Select the Shut Do wn button, then select Shut do wn from the drop do wn list. â Press and hold do wn the po wer button for at least 4 seconds. â Unplug the notebook from external po wer and remo ve the battery pack. For battery pack remo v al instructions see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section, later in this chapter . T ask Pr ocedure Results T ur n on the notebook. Press the pow er button. â Pressing the power button turns on the notebook from Standby, Hibernation, or shutdown. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns on. â Operating system loads . Shut down the notebook.* Select Star t > T urn Off Computer > T ur n Off. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns off . â Operating system shuts down. â Notebook tur ns off . T ur n off the display when the notebook is closed. Close the notebook. When the notebook is closed, the displa y presses the displa y s witch, which then tur ns off the displa y . *If the system is unresponsiv e, and you ar e unab le to shut down the notebook with this procedure, see âUsing Emerge ncy Shutdo wn Proceduresâ ne xt in this section. 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â7 Initia ting or Resuming from Standb y T ask Pr ocedure Result User-initiated Standby With the notebook on, use either of the f ollowing procedures: â Press the Fn F5 hotke ys . â Select Star t > T ur n off Computer > Stand b y . â P o wer/standb y light flashes. â Screen clears. System-initiated Standby If the notebook is running on e xter nal pow er , the system does not initiate Standby . If the notebook is running on batter y pow er , the system initiates Standby after 10 minutes of notebook inactivity . â P o wer/standb y light flashes. â Screen clears. Resume from user-initiated or system-initiated Standby . â Briefly press the power b utton, or mov e (or click any b utton on) an optional e xter nal USB mouse. â If the displa y was closed while the notebook was in Standby , open the display . â P o wer/standb y light tur ns on. â Y our work retur ns to the screen. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r Initia ting or Restorin g from Hiberna tion T ask Procedure Result User-initiated Hiber nation With the notebook on, use either of the f ollowing procedures: â Briefly press the power b utton. â Select Star t > Shut Down > Hiber nate. (If the Hibernate option is not displa yed, press and hold shift. ) â If the notebook is in Standby, you must resume from Standby before you can initiate Hibernation. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns off . â Screen clears. System-initiated Hiber nation If the notebook is running on e xter nal pow er , the system does not initiate Hiber nation. If the notebook is running on batter y pow er , the system initiates Hiber nation: â After 30 minutes of notebook inactivity , or â When an inser ted batter y pack reaches a cr itical low-battery condition (1 percent of a full charge remaining). â P o wer/standb y light tur ns off . â Screen clears. Restore from user-initiated or system-initiated Hiber nation. Press the pow er button. â If the system initiated Hibernation because of a critical low-battery condition, connect external power or insert a charged battery pack before you press the power button. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns on. â Y our work returns to the screen. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â9 Set ting P o w er Control Pr efer ences By default, when the notebook is on: â Briefly pressing the po wer button initiates Hibernation. â Pressing the Fn F5 hotke ys, called the âsleep bu ttonâ in the operating system, initiates Standby . â The display switch turns of f the display . The display switch is acti v ated by closing the display . (At default and all custom settings, the display switch also turns on the notebook if the display is opened while the notebook is in Standby .) T o change the function of the po wer button, the Fn F5 hotke ys, or the display switch: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Adv anced tab . â T o change the po wer button function, select a function from the drop-do wn list for When I Press The Po wer Button On My Computer . â T o change the function of the Fn F5 hotke ys, select a function from the drop-do wn list for When I Press The Sleep Button On My Computer . â T o change the display switch function, select a function from the drop-do wn list for When I Close The Lid Of My Portable Computer . 2. Select the OK b utton. The Hibernate function is a vaila ble in the po wer b utton, sleep b utton, and display switch drop-down lists only if Hibernation is enabled. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Using B a t ter y P o w er Id entifying t h e Ba t ter y an d P o w er/Standb y Ligh ts Battery pack procedures refer to the: Identify ing the battery and pow er/s tandb y lights 1 P o wer/standb y light 2 Batter y light 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â11 S witchin g Bet w een B a t ter y and External Po w e r The notebook switches between external po wer and battery po wer according to the av ailability of e xternal po wer . T o conserve the charge in an inserted battery pack, the notebook runs on external po wer whene v er external po wer is a v ailable. External po wer can be supplied from an electrical outlet through an A C adapter or an optional DC cable. If the notebook contains a charged battery pack and is running on external po wer , the notebook switches to battery po wer only if the A C adapter or DC cable is disconnected from the notebook. The Po wer Meter icon in the system tray changes shape whene ver the po wer source changes between battery po wer and external po wer . Cha r g i ng a Batt e ry P ack The battery pack char ges whenev er the notebook is connected to external po wer through an A C adapter or an optional DC cable. The battery pack char ges whether the notebook is turned off or turned on, b ut charges most quickly when the notebook is turned of f. When the notebook is turned on, charging times are longer and v ary with system acti vity . The battery light displays char ge status: â On and orange: the battery pack is char ging. â On and green: the battery pack is fully charged. â Flashing: the battery pack is malfunctioning and may need to be replaced. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Monitoring t he C h arge in a B a t ter y P ac k Obtainin g Accura te Ch arge Information T o increase the accuracy of all battery char ge displays: â Allo w the battery pack to discharge to less than 10 percent of a full char ge through normal use before charging it. â Char ge the battery pack fully . Even a ne w battery pack can display char ge information inaccurately if it has not been fully char ged. â If a battery pack has not been used for one month or more, the battery pack may need to be calibrated. Disp lay in g Ch arge Infor ma tion T o display battery charge information on the screen, use the operating system Po wer Meter feature. T o access Po wer Meter displays, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Meter tab . Po wer Meter displays battery status in both percent and time: â The percent indicates the amount of char ge remaining in the battery pack. â The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery pack if the battery pac k continues to pr ovide power at the curr ent le vel. For e xample, the time remaining will decrease if you start playing a D VD and will increase if you stop playing a D VD. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â13 Manag ing L o w -Bat te r y Cond it ion s The information in this section describes default alerts and system responses. Id entif ying Lo w-Ba tter y C onditions When the battery pack is the only po wer source for the notebook and drops to 10 percent of a full char ge, the notebook has reached a low-battery condition. A text w arning message appears on the screen. If a lo w-battery condition is not resolved and the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack continues to drop, the notebook e ventually enters a critical low-battery condition. Then, if the notebook is on or in Standby: â If Hibernation is enabled, the system initiates Hibernation. Unsa ved work may be lost. â If Hibernation is disabled, the notebook remains briefly in Standby , then shuts do wn. The power/standb y light turns of f, and the notebook cannot sa ve system memory to the hard dri ve. Resol ving Lo w-Ba t ter y Con ditions à CAUT ION: If the n otebook has r eached a c r itical lo w-battery condition and has begun to initiat e Hibern ation , do not re stor e po we r until Hibernati on is complete . When H ibernation is com plete , the po w er/standb y light tur ns off . If e xternal power is available, connect the notebook to the external po wer source. If a char ged battery pac k is available, shut do wn the notebook or initiate Hibernation. Insert a char ged battery pack, then turn on the notebook. If no power sour ce is available, sa ve your work. Then initiate Hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r C alibra ting a B a t ter y P ac k When to Calib rate Even if a battery pack is hea vily used, it should not be necessary to calibrate it more than once a month. It is not necessary to calibrate a ne w battery pack before first use. Calibrate the battery pack under the follo wing conditions: â When battery char ge displays seem inaccurate. â When you observe a signif icant change in battery run time. â When the battery pack has not been used for one month or more. Ho w to C alibrate T o calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully dischar ge, then fully recharge the battery pack. C harging t he B a t tery P ac k Char ge the battery pack while the notebook is in use. T o charge the battery pack: 1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook. For instructions, see âReplacing a Battery Packâ later in this chapter . 2. Connect the notebook to external po wer . (The battery light is on and orange as the battery pack char ges.) 3. Lea ve the notebook connected to e xternal po wer until the battery pack is fully char ged. (The battery light turns green.) Disc harging t h e Ba t ter y P ack Before you begin the full dischar ge, disable Hibernation. T o disable Hibernation, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Hibernate tab . Then clear the Enable Hibernation check box . 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â15 If you use the notebook occasionally during the dischar ge procedure and ha ve set ener gy-saving timeouts, e xpect the follo wing performance from your system during the discharge process: â The monitor will not turn of f automatically . â Hard dri ve speed will not decrease automatically while the notebook is idle. â System-initiated Standby will not occur . Ã CAUT ION: If yo u plan to leav e the notebook unattended dur ing disc harge , s av e yo ur wo rk bef or e starting the disc harge pr ocedur e . T o fully discharge the battery pack: 1. Select the po wer icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Schemes tab . 2. Record all settings in the Pl ugged In column and all settings in the Running On Batteries column, so you can reset them after calibration. 3. Use the drop-do wn lists to set each item in both columns to Ne ve r . 4. Select the OK b utton. 5. Disconnect the notebook from the external po wer source, b ut do not turn of f the notebook. 6. Run the notebook on battery po wer until the battery pack is fully dischar ged. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the battery light turns of f and the notebook shuts do wn. 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Rech arging t he B at ter y P ac k 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and k eep the notebook connected until the battery pack is fully rechar ged and the battery light turns green. Y ou can use the notebook while the battery pack is rechar ging, but the battery pack will char ge faster if the notebook is turned of f. 2. Select the Po wer icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Schemes tab . 3. Reenter the settings you recorded for the items in the Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column. 4. Select the OK b utton. Ã CAUT ION: After calibr ating the battery pack , reena ble Hiber nation: selec t Start > Contr ol P a nel > P erfor mance and Maintenance > P ow er Options > H ibernate ta b, the n select the Enable H ibernation c hec k box . Storing a B a t ter y P ack If the notebook will be unused and unplugged for more than 2 weeks, remov e and store the battery pack. Ã CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to a batter y pac k, do not e xpose it t o high tem peratur es f or e xtended per iods of time . High temperatures, which may be present in parked cars or some workplaces, accelerate the self-disch ar ge rate of a stored battery pack. T o prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a location that is cool and dry . T o maintain the accuracy of battery char ge displays, calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â17 Ba t ter y C onser v ation Set tin gs and Procedur es Using the follo wing battery conserv ation settings and procedures extends the run time of a battery pack. â T urn of f wireless and local area netw ork (LAN) connections and exit modem applications wh en you are not using them. â Disconnect from the notebook any e xternal de vices that use po wer from the notebook. Battery run time is not af fected by external de vices that are plugged into an e xternal po wer source. â Stop or remov e a PC Card you are not using. â Disable or remov e an SD (Secure Digital) Card or MMC (multimedia card) you are not using. â Lo wer screen brightness. Screen brightness can be lo wered by pressing the Fn F7 hotke ys. â Lo wer system volume. V olume can be lo wered with the decrease v olume button. â T urn of f a de vice connected to the S-V ideo connector . A de vice connected to the S-V ideo connector can be turned of f by using the Fn F4 hotke ys to switch the image from the S-V ideo device to the notebook display . â If you lea ve your wo rk, initiate Standby or Hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. â Select a short wait time, 5 minutes or less, for the monitor timeout. T o change monitor timeout settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Meter tab . Select a short w ait time from the T urn Of f Monitor drop-do wn list, then select OK. 345561-001.book Page 17 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â18 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Rep l a c i n g a B a t te r y P a c k à CAUT ION: T o pr e v ent los s of w ork w hen r emo v ing a bat tery pack that is the only po w er sour ce , initiate H ibernation or tur n off the not ebook bef or e r emov ing the battery pack . T o replace the battery pack: 1. T urn the notebook underside up. â T o remov e a battery pack, slide the battery release latch 1 . (The battery pack tilts upward.) Then pull the battery pack out of the battery bay 2 . R emo ving a battery pac k 345561-001.book Page 18 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â19 â T o insert a battery pack, in sert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook 1 , then tilt the battery pack do wnward until it snaps into place 2 . Inserting a battery pack 2. T o restore from Hibernation or to turn on the notebook, press the po wer button. Rec y c ling or Dis posin g of a Used Batte ry P ack For information about rec ycling or disposing of a used battery pack, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide, âBattery Noticeâ section. 345561-001.book Page 19 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â20 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r 345561-001.book Page 20 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â1 5 Dri v e s an d Dri v e Media Cont ents Understanding Drive and Drive Media Terms . . . . . . . . . 5â2 Caring for Drives and Drive Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 Adding a Drive to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4 Using the IDE Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4 Inserting or Removing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5 Inserting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5 Removing a Disc (With Power). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 Removing a Disc (Without Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 Displaying Media Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 Protecting Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 Observing the Copyright Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 Setting the Boot Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 Replacing the Internal Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Un derstandin g Driv e an d Driv e M edia T erms Har d drives are for the permanent storage of data f iles and of software such as system f iles, applications, and dri vers. A hard dri ve is sometimes called a har d disk drive . Diskette drives support disk ettes , which are used to store or transport data. The notebook can read or write to any disk ette. A diskette dri v e is sometimes called a floppy disk drive. Optical drives include CD and D VD dri v es. Optical driv es support CDs and D VDs, often called discs, which are used to store or transport data and to play music and movies. D VDs hav e higher capacities than CDs. The notebook can read or write to optical dri ves as described in the follo wing table. A drive designation is a letter of the alphabet that the notebook uses to identify the dri ve. T o display the driv e designation of all the dri ves in the system, select Start > My Computer . A diskette or disc that can be inserted or remo ved from a dri v e is referred to as a drive medium. Fo r ex a mp l e, the term drive media includes diskettes, CDs, and D VDs. Optical Drive Read Write CD-ROM driv e Y es No D VD-ROM driv e Y es No CD-R W drive Y es Y es D VD/CD-R W dr iv e Y es Y es 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â3 C aring for Dri v e s and Driv e Media à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to the notebook or a dr iv e and loss of work: â Do not r emo v e the inter nal hard dr i ve e x cept fo r repair or r eplacement . F or ins truc tions, s ee theâReplac ing the In ternal Har d Dr iv e â sec tion later in this c hapter . â Electr os tatic disc har ge can damage electr onic compone nts. T o pre ven t electr ost atic damage to the notebook or a dr i ve , f ollow these 2 pr ecau tions: (1) Disc harg e your self fr om s tatic elec tri c it y bef or e handling a dri v e by touc hing a gr ounded metal object and (2) A v oi d touching the connect ors on a dr iv e . F or mor e infor mation about pr e v enting electr os tatic damage , r ef er on the Doc umentati on Li b ra r y CD to the Regulatory and Saf ety Notices guide , âElectr os tatic Disc harge â s ection . â Ex cessi v e for ce can damage dr i ve connec tors . When y ou inse r t a dr iv e , use o nly enough f or ce to s eat the dri v e . â Handle a dri v e car efull y . Do not dr op it. â A vo id e xposing a har d dr iv e or a disk ette to de vi ces w ith magnetic f ields. Pr oduc ts w ith magnetic f ields inc lude vi deo and audio t ape er asure pr oduc ts, monitors , and speak ers . Sec urity dev i ces w ith magnetic f ie lds include airport w alk -through de v ices and sec ur ity w ands. T he airport sec urity dev i ces that chec k carry-on luggage , usuall y while it is placed on a con v ey or belt , us e x -ra y s instead of magnetism and w ill not damage a har d dr iv e or a disk ette . â Do not spr a y a dri v e with c leaners . â A vo id e xposing a dr i ve t o liquids or t emper atur e extr eme s. â If y ou mail a dr iv e , ship it in pack aging that pr otec ts it fr om shock , v ibrati on , extr eme t emper atur es, and hi gh humidity . La bel the pack age âFRA GILE . â à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to dri v e media: â Do not open the metal sh utter of a disk ette or touch the disk w ithin the disk ette case . â Do not e xpose a disk ette to a str ong magneti c fi eld, suc h as the sec ur it y fi eld used b y a w alk -t hr ough sec uri t y de vi ce or a handheld sec ur it y wand . â Clean a CD or D VD onl y with a dis c cleaning kit , a vailable f r om most electr onics r etailers. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Adding a Driv e to th e S y s tem The internal hard dri ve and optical dri v e are standard features of the notebook. The type of optical dri ve v aries by notebook model. An optional dri ve can be added to the system b y connecting it, as instructed in the dri ve documentation, to one of the USB (uni versal serial b us) connectors or to the 1394 connector . Hard dri ve capacity can also be added with a microdri v e PC Card. An SD Card or MMC (multimedia card) can provide additional data storage. Using t h e I DE Driv e Light The IDE (Integrated Dri v e Electronics) light turns on when the internal hard dri ve or optical dri v e is being accessed. Identify ing the IDE dri v e ligh t 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â5 Inser ting or Remo v ing a Dis c Inserting a Disc 1. T urn on the notebook. 2. Press the release b utton 1 on the driv e bezel to release the media tray , then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2 . 3. Position a CD or one-sided D VD o ver the tray , label side up. 4. Gently press the center of the disc onto the tray spindle 3 until the disc snaps into place. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. (If the media tray is not fully e xtended, tilt the disc to position it ov er the tray spindle, then press it do wnward into position.) 5. Close the media tray 4 . Inserting a disc int o the optical dr i ve 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Rem o vin g a D is c ( Wi t h P o w e r) 1. T urn on the notebook. 2. Press the release b utton 1 on the driv e bezel to release the media tray , then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2 . 3. Remov e the disc from the tray by gently pushing do wn on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3 . Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surf aces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remo ve it. 4. Close the media tray 4 . 5. Place the disc in a protecti ve case. R emo ving a dis c fr om the opti cal dri v e w hen po w er is av ailable 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â7 Rem o vin g a D is c ( Wi t h ou t P o wer) If the notebook is turned of f or if no po wer is av ailable, the release b utton on the optical driv e will not work. T o remove a disc from an optical dri ve without using the release b utton: 1. Insert the end of a small object like a paper clip into the release access 1 in the front bezel of the dri ve. 2. Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is released, then pull the tray outward until it is fully e xtended 2 . 3. Remov e the disc from the tray by gently pushing do wn on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3 . Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surf aces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remo ve it. 4. Close the media tray 4 . 5. Place the disc in a protecti ve case. R emo ving a dis c fr om the opti cal dri v e w hen po we r is not a v ailable 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media P lay ing a Disc Y ou can play a CD in a CD dri ve or a D VD dri v e. Y ou can play a D VD only in a D V D dri ve. The information in this section a pplies to most optical dri ves and most disc software. F or information about specific disc softw are, including W indo ws Media Player , W inD VD, and Easy CD Creator , see the âUsing Multimedia Softw areâ section in Chapter 6. Disp l a ying M edia C ontents When you insert a CD or D VD into the system, the notebook can play the medium, display its contents, take no action, or display a response prompt on the screen. Y ou can choose ho w the notebook responds to the insertion of a medium by using the operating system AutoPlay feature. The notebook responds to the follo wing procedures at most AutoPlay settings: â T o pre vent an audio CD from opening when AutoPlay is enabled on the dri ve containing it, press the shift ke y as you insert the CD. â T o display the contents of a dri ve medium when the contents are not displayed by AutoPlay: 1. Insert the medium into the dri ve. 2. Select Start > Run, then type: explorer x: (where x = the dri ve designation of the dri v e containing the medium) 3. Select the OK b utton. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â9 Protectin g P lay bac k à CAUT ION: Inserting or r emov ing an y dev i ce while r unning an y multimedia a pplicati on may pau se or stop the pla y . à CAUT ION: Initiating Standb y or Hiber nation w hile pla y ing a dri v e medium ma y stop the pla y or diminish the quality of the play . If Standby or Hibernation is accidentally initiated during playback: â If you see the warning message âPutting the computer into Hibernation or Standby may stop the playback. Do you w ant to continue?â select No. (Audio and video may resume or you may need to restart the dri ve medium.) â If Standby or Hibernation initiates and no w arning message is displayed, resume from Hibernation or Standby b y briefly pressing the po wer button, then restart the medium. Obs er ving t he C op yright W arning It is a criminal of fense, under applicable copyright la ws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, f ilms, broadcasts, and sound recordings. This notebook should not be used for such purposes. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Set tin g th e Boot O rder By default, the notebook starts up from the internal hard dri v e. Y ou can set the notebook to start up from any bootable CD or D VD in the optical dri v e. A bootable CD or D VD contains f iles needed by the notebook to start up and operate properly . On some models, you can also start up from a dri ve connected to the notebook by USB. Startup preferences are set in th e Setup utility . The Setup utility is not a W indo ws utility and does not support the T ouchP ad. For information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. Rep l a c i n g t h e I n te rn al H ard Dr iv e The hard dri ve in the hard dri v e bay is the internal hard driv e. Remov e the internal hard dri ve only for repair or replacement. Ã CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t an unre sponsiv e s y stem and los s of w ork , do not begin this pr ocedur e until y ou hav e: â Sa ved y our w or k, c losed all open a pplicati ons, and shu t dow n the notebook. â Disconnect ed the notebook fr om e xter nal pow er and r emo v ed the battery pack . 1. Sa ve your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut do wn the notebook and close the display . 3. Disconnect the notebook from external po wer . 4. Remov e the battery pack. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â11 5. T urn the notebook underside up. 6. Remov e the 2 hard dri ve retaining scre ws. R emo ving the har d dr i v e r etaining sc r e ws 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media 7. T o remov e a hard dri ve, grasp the hard dri v e assembly (the hard dri ve, the hard dri v e cov er , and the hard dri ve brack et) using the hard dri ve recess 1 . T ilt the hard dri v e assembly upward 2 , then pull the assembly from the hard dri v e bay 3 . R emo ving an in ternal har d dr i ve f r om the har d dri v e ba y 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â13 8. T o insert a hard dri ve, insert the 2 alignment tabs on the hard dri ve co ver into the 2 alignment slots on the hard dri v e bay 1 , then tilt the hard dri ve assembly do wnward into the hard dri v e bay until it is seated 2 . Inserting an inter nal har d dri v e into the har d dr i ve ba y 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media 9. If you ha ve inserted a hard dri ve, reinsert the 2 hard dri v e retaining scre ws. (If you remov ed but did not replace a hard dri ve, put the retaining scre ws in a safe place.) R eplac ing the hard dr i v e r etaining sc r e w 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â1 6 Multim edi a Cont ents Adjusting Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â2 Using the Internal Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â3 Connecting an Audio Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â4 Connecting an S-Video Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 Connecting the Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 Connecting the Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 Turning a Video Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â6 Changing the Color Television Format . . . . . . . . . . . 6â6 Using Multimedia Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â7 Using Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â7 Using WinDVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â7 Using Easy CD Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â9 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia Adjustin g V olume V olume can be adjusted by using the audio b uttons on the notebook or by using operating system or application v olume control software. The mute b utton ov errides all software v olume settings. T o adjust volume using the audio b uttons: â T o increase volume, press the increase v olume b utton 1 . â T o decrease v olume, press the decrease volume b utton 2 . â T o mute or restore v olume, press the mute button 3 . When v olume is muted, the mute light 4 turns on. When v olume is restored, the mute light turns of f. Identify ing the audi o buttons and mute li ght 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â3 Using t h e Internal Speak e rs The internal speakers play sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games, dri ve media, the Internet, and other sources. If an external de vice, such as a headset, is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled. Identify ing the inter nal speak er s 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia Con necting an A udi o De v ice à W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of pers onal injury , adjus t the volume bef or e putting on headphones or a headset . à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t possible damage to an exte rnal de vi ce , do not plug a monaur al (single sound c hannel) plug into the audi o -out jac k. The notebook has 2 audio jacks: â The microphone jack 1 connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. If a monaural microphone is connected, the same information is recorded on both channels. â The audio-out jack 2 , sometimes called a line-out jack, connects headphones or po wered external stereo speak ers. The audio-out jack is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. When you connect a de vice to the audio-out jack: â Use only a 3.5-mm plug. â The internal speakers are disabled. Identify ing the audi o jac ks 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â5 Con necting an S - Vi deo De vic e Con necti ng the Audi o The S-V ideo jack supports video signals only . If you are setting up a conf igura tion that combines audio and video functions, such as playing a D VD mo vie on your notebook and displaying it on your tele vision, you will need a standard 3.5-mm audio cable a vailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the notebook audio-out jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the audio input jack on the external de vice. Con necting the V ideo T o transmit video signals through the S-V ideo jack, you will need a standard S-V ideo cable av ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug either end of the S-V ideo cable into the notebook S-V ideo jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the S-V ideo input jack on the external de vice. Identify ing the S - Vi deo jac k 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia T urning a Video D e v ice O n and O ff T o turn on a video de vice that is connected to the notebook, start or restart the notebook. Or , repeatedly press the Fn F4 hotke ys to switch the image. Pressing the Fn F4 hotke ys switches the image among the notebook display , any connected displays, and simultaneous display on the notebook and all connected displays. â Switching the image to a connected video de vice turns on the video de vice. â Switching the image to the notebook display only turns of f the video de vice. Cha ng i ng the C olo r T e le v is i o n F or m at Color tele vision formats are modes by which tele vision video signals are sent and recei ved. T o send signals between the notebook and a tele vision, both the notebook and the television must be using the same color tele vision format. The NTSC format is common in the United States, Canada, Japan, and South K orea. The P AL format is common in Europe, China, Russia, and Africa, and the P AL-M format is common in Brazil. Other South American and Central American countries may use NTSC, P AL, or P AL-M. Region-specif ic formats are set at the factory for most notebooks, b ut the region setting can be changed on an y notebook. Color tele vision format settings are changed in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is not a W indo ws utility and does not support the T ouchPad. F or information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â7 Using M ultimedi a Soft w are Using Windo w s Media Pla y er Use W indo ws Media Player primarily for playing audio CDs. Although video CDs can be played using W indo ws Media Player , InterV ideo W inD VD pro vides higher quality playback. T o open W indo ws Media Player , insert a CD into the optical dri ve, then close the tray . W ait se veral seconds. If W indo ws Media Player does not open, select Start > All Programs > W indo ws Media Player . T o play or stop the CD, use the on-screen Play b utton or Stop b utton, or use the media hotkeys described in the âHotk eysâ section of Chapter 3. Using WinD VD W inD VD is an application that enables you to play D VD movies or video CDs. If W inD VD is included with your notebook, the application is preinstalled. P l a ying a D VD or Video CD For best playback quality , sa ve and close all f iles and software unrelated to playing the D VD or video CD. If a D VD displays a Playback Of Content From This Re gion Is Not Permitted error message, stop the D VD, change the re gion setting, then restart the D VD. F or information about changing the region setting, see âManaging D VD Region Settingsâ ne xt in this chapter . 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia T o play a D VD or video CD: 1. Insert the D VD or video CD into the optical dri v e. 2. Assign W inD VD to play the video: â If the Microsoft W indo ws XP AppPicker windo w is displayed, select Play V ideo By Using W inD VD. â If the Microsoft W indo ws XP AppPicker windo w is not displayed, select Start > All Programs > InterV ideo W inD VD > InterV ideo W inD VD. 3. Follo w the instructions on the screen. Man agin g D VD Region Settin gs Most D VDs that contain copyrighted f iles also contain re gion codes. The region codes help protect cop yrights internationally . Y ou can play a D VD containing a re gion code only if the region code on the D VD matches the re gion setting on your D VD dri v e. If the region code on a D VD does not match the region setting on your dri v e, a Playback Of Content From This Region Is Not Permitted message is displayed when you insert the D VD. T o play the D VD, you must change the re gion setting on your DV D d r i v e . Ã CAUT ION: The r egio n setting on your D VD dr i ve can be c hanged only 5t i m e s . â The r egi on setting y ou selec t the fifth time becomes the per manent r egion s etting on the dri v e . â The n umber of allo wa ble regi on change s remaining o n the dri v e is displa yed in the R emaining T imes Until P ermane nt fi eld in the W inDVD w indo w . The number in the f ield inc ludes the fifth and permane nt change . T o change the region setting on dri v e media: 1. Insert the D VD into the optical dri v e. 2. If W inD VD does not open after a short pause, select Start > All Programs > InterV ideo W inD VD > InterV ideo W inD VD. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â9 3. Select the Properties icon in the lo wer right corner of the windo w . 4. Select the General tab . 5. Select the b utton for the region. 6. Select the OK b utton. Using E asy CD Creator Easy CD Creator is a data transfer utility that enables you to create or duplicate optical dri ve media. The utility is installed on select models and can be used with any CD or D VD supported by any optical dri v e in the system. When Easy CD Creator is insta lled, a âBurn CD & D VDs with Roxioâ icon is displayed at Start > All Programs > Start Menu. Und erstandin g Ea sy CD Creator F ea tures Easy CD Creator includes 2 applications: DirectCD and Easy CD Creator . The Easy CD Creator application includes CD Copier . â Use DirectCD with W indo ws Explorer to drag-and-drop data f iles between your hard dri ve and a CD or D VD or between your hard dri ve and a netw ork dr i ve. DirectCD is often used to back up data f iles or to share them with other people. Although DirectCD can be used with most application data f iles, including Microsoft Off ice data f iles, it cannot be used with audio f iles such as MP3 files. â Use Easy CD Creator , which includes CD Copier , to copy either data f iles such as Microsoft Off ice f iles, or audio f iles such as MP3 f iles, to a CD or D VD. â Use Easy CD Creator to copy indi vidual audio f iles to a CD or D VD, for e xample, to create a CD containing only your fa v orites. â Use CD Copier to duplicate a CD or D VD. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Multimedia Preparing to Use E asy CD Creator à CAUT ION: T o pr e ve nt loss o f wo rk and damage to a CD or D VD: â Bef or e wr iting to a CD or D VD , connect the no tebook to a r eliable e xternal po w er sour ce . Do not w rit e to a CD or D VD while the notebook is running on battery po wer . â Bef or e wr iting to a CD or D VD , clo se all open applicati ons (inc luding scr een sa ve rs and anti vir us softw are) e x cept E as y CD Cr eator Basic . â Do not cop y dir ectly f rom a CD or D VD to another CD or D VD or fr om a netw ork dr i ve to a CD or D VD . Inst ead, cop y fr om a CD , D VD , or a networ k dri v e to y our hard dr i ve , then cop y fr om y our har d dri v e to the CD or D VD . â D o no t t y pe o n t h e n ot e b o o k keybo a rd o r m ove t h e n o t e bo o k wh i l e the notebook is w riting t o a CD or DVD . T he wr ite pr ocess is sensiti v e to v ibr ation . C hoosing Recording M edia HP recommends using high-quality media that correspond to the maximum speed of the optical dri ve. The notebook can write or copy to CDs and D VDs which provide one-time, non-erasable recording or to CDs and D VDs which pro vide erasable recording. Responding to th e UDF Prompt The f irst time you insert a CD or D VD into an optical dri ve, you may be prompted to install Uni versal Disk F ormat (UDF) Reader . When UDF Reader is installed, a CD or D VD created with DirectCD on your notebook can be used in another computer on which DirectCD is not installed. â Even if UDF Reader is installed on your notebook, a CD or D VD created with DirectCD software can be used in a compatible optical dri ve only if you select th e Rearrange the Files option as you create the CD or D VD. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â11 F ormat tin g Recor ding Medi a Y ou can purchase optical dri ve media that either are or are not formatted for DirectCD. â T o use DirectCD, use a CD or D VD formatted for DirectCD. â T o use Easy CD Creator or CD Copier , do not use a CD or D VD formatted for DirectCD. T o erase DirectCD formatting from a CD or D VD so the CD or D VD can be used with Easy CD Creator or CD Copier: 1. Insert the CD or D VD into the optical dri v e. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Easy CD Creator Basic > CD-R W Eraser . 3. Select the Erase b utton. 4. Select the OK b utton. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Multimedia Selec ting E asy CD Creator Set ting s T o use DirectCD, Easy CD Creator , or CD Copier , the default settings sho wn in the follo wing table must be selected. These settings are compatible; for example, the settings for DirectCD do not conflict with the settings for CD Copier . â Auto Insert Notif ication settings are selected through the operating system. â T o select Disk-at-once settings: 1. Select Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD Creator 5 > Applications > CD Copier . 2. Select the Adv anced tab . 3. Clear the Disk-at-Once check box. 4. Select the Set as Default b utton. â T o select T rack-at-once settings: 1. Select Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD Creator 5. 2. The fourth item on the status bar at the lo wer edge of the CD Project windo w indicates whether T rack-at-Once or Disk-at-Once is selected. â If T rack-at-Once is displayed on the status bar , T rack-at-Once is already enabled. â If Disk-at-Once is selected, double-click Disk-at-Once to enable T rack-at-Once. Application Required Settings DirectCD Enab le Auto Inser t Notification Easy CD Creator Disab le Disk-at-Once and Enab le T rac k-at-Once CD Copier Disab le Disk-at-Once 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â1 7 Com mu nic ati on s Cont ents Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â2 Connecting the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â3 Using the Modem While Traveling Internationally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â6 Accessing Communication Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â9 Finding AT Command Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â9 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â10 Connecting the Network Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â11 Turning a Network Connection Off and On . . . . . . 7â12 Accessing the Network at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â13 Setting Up an Infrared Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â14 Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared . . . . . . . . . 7â14 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions Modem All notebook models include an RJ-11 telephone jack, and some models ship with a preinstalled modem. A modem cable with RJ-11 connectors at each end is included with select models. Y ou need a modem cable to connect a modem. If your model did not include a modem cable, a modem cable can be purchased from most computer or electronics retailers. If you purchased a notebook with an internal modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are not standard, a country-specif ic modem adapter is included with the notebook. An internal modem supports: â All applications supported by the operating system. â V .34 ITU (International T elecommunications Union) analog modem recommendations for speeds up to 33.6 Kbps. â V .44 data compression algorithm. â V .90/V .92 ITU digital/analog modem pair recommendations for speeds up to 56 Kbps. The digital/analog modem pair rates allo w faster do wnloads only from compliant digital sources. Maximum achie v able do wnload rates are currently unkno wn, may not reach 56 Kbps, and will v ary with line conditions. Maximum achie v able upload rates are limited to 48 Kbps, may not reach 48 Kbps, and will v ary with line conditions. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â3 Con necting the Mo dem Selec ting C onnec tors A modem must be connected to an analog telephone line. Ã W ARNIN G: T o re d u c e t h e ri s k of e l e c t ric s h o ck, f i re, or d a m a g e t o t h e equipment , do not plug a telephone cable in to the RJ- 4 5 networ k jack . Ã CAUT ION: Jacks f or digit al PBX sy ste ms may r ese mble RJ-11 telephone jac ks, but ar e not co m patible w ith the modem. Jacks for analog telephone lines and procedures for connecting the modem v ary by country: â If you are connecting a modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are standard, follo w the instructions in âConnecting a Modem to an RJ-11 Jackâ next in this section. â If you are connecting a modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are not standard, a modem adapter specif ic to the country in which you purcha sed the notebook is included with the notebook. Follo w the instructions in âConnecting a Modem with an Adapterâ later in this section. â If you plan to use a modem outsi de the country in which you purchased the notebook, you can purchase adapters specif ic for the countries on your itinerary from most computer or electronics retailers. For information about using country-specif ic software configurations, see âUsing the Modem While T ra veling Internati onallyâ later in this section. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions Connec tin g a Modem to an RJ- 1 1 Jac k T o connect a modem to an analog telephone line that has an RJ-11 telephone jack: 1. Identify the RJ-11 1 jack on the notebook. 2. If your modem cable has noise suppression circuitry 2 , which pre vents interference with TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable to ward the notebook. 3. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 telephone jack (not the RJ-45 network jack) on the notebook 3 . 4. Plug the other end of the modem cable into an RJ-11 telephone jack (not into an RJ-45 network jack or a PBX jack) 4 . Co nnecting a modem to an RJ-11 te lephone w all jac k (T eleph one w all jac ks vary in appear ance by r egi on and country .) Ã W ARNIN G: To r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f e l e c t r i c s h o c k , d i s c o n n e c t t h e m o d e m fr om the teleph one networ k befo re acce ssing an inter nal compartment of the notebook. Internal com par tments inc lude the memory compartment and the battery and hard dr i ve ba ys . 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â5 Connec tin g a Modem wit h an Adapter T o connect a modem to an analog telephone line that does not ha ve an RJ-11 telephone jack: 1. Identify the RJ-11 jack 1 on the notebook. 2. If the modem cable has noise suppression circuitry 2 , which pre vents interference with TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable to ward the notebook. 3. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 telephone jack (not the RJ-45 network jack) on the notebook 3 . 4. Plug the modem cable into the country-specif ic modem adapter 4 . 5. Plug the country-specif ic modem adapter into the telephone jack 5 . Co nnecting a modem w ith a modem adapte r (T elepho ne wall j acks v ar y in appear ance by r egi on and country .) Ã W ARNIN G: To r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f e l e c t r i c s h o c k , d i s c o n n e c t t h e m o d e m fr om the teleph one networ k befo re acce ssing an inter nal compartment of the notebook. Internal com par tments inc lude the memory compartment and the battery and hard dr i ve ba ys . 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions Using t he Mod em While T ra v eling Intern at ionally An internal modem is conf igured to function in, and meet the operating standards of, the country in which you purchased the notebook. T o use an internal modem in other countries, you must add country-specif ic modem configurations. Disp lay in g th e Current Countr y C onfiguration T o display the current country conf iguration, select Start > Control Panel > Date, T ime, Language, and Regional Options category > Re gional and Language Options icon > Regional Options tab . The current country conf iguration of the modem is displayed in the Location panel. Adding a Coun tr y Confi guration à CAUT ION: T o pr e ve nt the loss o f yo ur cur r ent country conf igur ation , do not dele te or replace y our c urr en t countr y conf igur ation . Additi onal country config urati ons can be added w ithout deleting the c urr ent conf igur ation . à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t modem malfunc tion and v iolati on of telecomm unications r egulati ons and law s, u se the modem onl y w ith the country conf igur ation f or the country in whi ch y ou ar e using the mode m. T o add a country conf iguration: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â7 3. Select the Ne w button, then type a name for the ne w location in the Location Name f ield. 4. Select a country or region for the new location from the Country/Region list. If you select a country or regi on that is not supported b y the modem, the country conf iguration defaults to USA or UK. 5. Select the OK b utton > OK button. Solv in g T r av el Connec tion Problems If you experience connection problems while using a modem outside the country in which you purchased the notebook, the follo wing suggestions may be helpful. Before changing any settings, you may w ant to write do wn your current settings so you can quickly replace those settings when you return home. C hec k t he Line A modem requires an analog, not a digital, telephone line. A line described as a PBX line is usually a digital line. A telephone line described as a data line, fax machine line, modem line, or standard telephone line is probably an analog line. C hec k t he Di aling Mode Dial a fe w digits on the telephone, then listen for clicks or tones. Clicks indicate that the telephone line supports pulse dialing. T ones indicate that the telephone line supports tone dialing. T o set an internal modem to support a dialing mode: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab . 3. Select your location, then select the Edit b utton. 4. Select the T one or Pulse radio b utton. 5. Select the OK b utton > OK button. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions C hec k t he T elephone Nu mber Dial the telephone number on the telephone, verify that the remote modem is answering, then hang up. C hec k t he Di al T on e If a modem recei ves a dial tone it does not recognize, the modem will not dial and will display a No Dial T one error message. â T o set the modem to ignore all dial tones before dialing: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Modems tab . 3. Select your modem > Properties b utton > Modem tab . 4. Clear the W ait For Dial T o ne Before Dialing check box. 5. Select the OK b utton > OK button. â If you continue to recei ve the No Dial T one error message after clearing the check box: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the Network and Internet Connections windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab . 3. Select your location, then select the Edit b utton. 4. Select your location from the Country/Region list. If you select a country or region that is not supported by the modem, the country conf iguration defaults to USA or UK. 5. Select the OK b utton. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â9 6. In the Phone and Modem Options windo w , select the Modems tab . 7. Select your modem > Properties b utton > Modem tab . 8. Clear the W ait For Dial T o ne Before Dialing check box. 9. Select the OK b utton > OK button. Accessing C ommunica tion Soft w are T o access preinstalled modem software, including softw are for terminal emulation and data transfer , select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications, then select an application, wizard, or utility . Finding A T C omman d Infor m ation It is not necessary to use A T commands with most modem software. If you prefer to use A T commands, refer on the Documentation Library CD to: â Modem Commands Guidelines (Advanced Users Only) for information about accessing HyperT erminal, identifying the modem model in your notebook, and using A T commands. â Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) for the A T commands supported by an Agere modem. If your notebook shipped with an internal modem, that modem supports the Agere command set. For command updates and supplementary information about your Agere modem, visit: http://www .agere.com Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) is provided on the Documentation Library CD in English only . 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Com mun ica t ions Netw ork All notebook models ship with an RJ-45 network jack. A netw ork cable with RJ-45 connectors at eac h end is included with select models. The notebook can be connected to a network whether or not the internal modem is connected to a telephone line. If your notebook is connected to a network, you may w ant to confer with your network administrator before changing netw ork settings. The notebook supports network speeds up to 10 Mbps when connected to a 10BaseT network and 100 Mbps when connected to a 100BaseTX network. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â11 Con necti ng the Ne tw or k Cable A network cable has an 8-pin RJ -45 network connector at each end and may contain noise suppressi on circuitry , which pre vents interference with TV and radio reception. T o connect the cable: 1. Identify the RJ-45 network jack 1 on the notebook. 2. Orient the end of a network cable with noise suppression circuitry 2 to ward the notebook. 3. Plug the network cable into the notebook RJ-45 network jack 3 . 4. Plug the other end of the cable into the network RJ-45 jack 4 . Co nnecting a networ k cable à W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of electr ic shoc k, dis connect the netw ork ca ble befo re acce ssing an inter nal compartment of the notebook . Inter nal compartments include the memo r y compartment and the battery and hard dr iv e ba ys . 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Com mun ica t ions T urnin g a Net w ork C onnec tion O ff an d O n T o conserve po wer , turn off a netw ork connection you are not using. â T o turn of f a network connection, log of f the network, then disconnect the network cable. â T o turn on a network connectio n, connect the netw ork cable, then log on to the network. Accessin g t he N et w ork at Star tu p T o connect the notebook to a PXE (Preboot eXecution En vironment) serv er during startup, you must enable the internal NIC for startup, then respond to the Network Service Boot prompt each time you want to connect to the serv er . â T o enable the NIC for startup and set the notebook to display the Network Service Boot prompt each time the notebook is started or restarted, set your preferences in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is not a W indo ws utility and does not support the T ouchPad. F or more information about using the Setup utility , refer to the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9 of this guide. â T o respond to the Network Service Boot prompt, press F12 while the prompt F12 = Boot from LAN appears very briefly in the lo wer left corner of the screen before W indo ws loads. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â13 Infrar ed The notebook is IrD A-compliant and can communicate with another infrared-equipped de vice that is also IrD A-compliant. The IrD A connection speed standard is 4 me gabits per second (Mbps). The infrared port supports lo w-speed connections up to 115 kilobits per second (Kbps) as well as high-speed connections up to 4 Mbps. Infrared signals are sent through an in visible beam of infrared light and must ha ve an unobstructed line of sight. Infrared performance may v ary with the performance of infrared peripherals, the distance and angle between infrared de vices, and the applications being used. L inking to an infr ar ed de v ice 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Com mun ica t ions Set ting U p an Infrared T ransmission For information about using infrared softw are and enabling or disabling infrared ports, refer to the operating system Help f iles and to the documentation included with the external infrared de vice. T o set up 2 infrared de vices, such as the notebook and an optional printer , for optimal transmission: â Position the de vices so that their infrared ports face each other at a distance of no more than 3.3 feet (1 meter). â Position the ports so that they f ace each other directly . The maximum capture angle is 30 degrees, so the ports must be aligned no more than 15 degrees of f center v ertically or horizontally . â Shield the ports from direct sunlight, flashing incandescent light, and fluorescent light. â Be sure that signals from a remote control or other wireless de vice (such as a cell phone, a headset, or an audio de vice) do not aim at either port. â During the transmission, do not mov e either de vice and do not allo w objects or mov ement to disrupt the beam. A v oi ding Stan db y While Using Infrared Standby is not compatible with infrared transmission. If the notebook is in Standby , an infrared transmission cannot be initiated. If Standby initiates during an infrared transmission, the transmission stops. T o resume from Standby , briefly press the po wer b utton. The transmission resumes when the notebook resumes from Standby . 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â1 8 Ha r d w ar e Op t io n s an d Upg r ades Cont ents Connecting a Powered Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â2 Connecting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â2 Using a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â3 Selecting a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â3 Configuring a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â4 Inserting a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â4 Stopping and Removing a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â5 Using an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â6 Using the SD Card Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â6 Inserting an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â7 Removing an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â8 Disabling or Restarting an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . 8â8 Increasing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9 Displaying Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9 Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . . . . . . . 8â10 Connecting an Optional Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â15 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Conn ec ting a P o w ered De vice T o connect the notebook to an optional external de vice that has a po wer cord: 1. Be sure the de vice is turned of f. 2. Connect the de vice to the jack or connector on the notebook specif ied by the de vice manufacturer . 3. Plug the de vice po wer cord into a grounded electrical outlet. 4. T urn on the de vice. â If a properly connected external monitor or other display de vice does not display an image, try pressing the Fn F4 hotke ys to switch the image to the ne w de vice. T o disconnect a po wered external de vice from the notebook: 1. T urn of f the de vice. 2. Disconnect the de vice from the notebook. Con necting a USB De vic e USB (uni versal serial b us) is a hardware interf ace that can be used to connect external de vices such as a USB k eyboard, mouse, dri ve, printer , scanner , or hub to the notebook. A hub is a connecting de vice that can be either po wered or unpo wered. USB hubs can be connected to a USB connector on the notebook or to other USB de vices. Hubs support v arying numbers of USB de vices and are us ed to increase the number of USB de vices in the system. â Po wered hubs must be connected to external po wer . â Unpo wered hubs must be connected either to a USB connector on the notebook or to a port on a po wered hub . 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â3 The USB connectors on the notebook support USB 2.0- and 1.1-compliant de vices. By default, USB de vices function only while the operating system is loaded. T o use a USB ke yboard or hub connected to a USB connector on the notebook during startup (before W indo ws loads) or in a non-W indo ws application or utility , enable USB leg acy support in the Setup utility . For more information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. Identify ing the 3 USB co nnector s on the notebook 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Using a PC Card A PC Card is a credit cardâsized accessory designed to conform to the standard specif ications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). The notebook PC Card slot supports both 32-bit CardBus and 16-bit PC Cards. PC Cards can be used to add m odem, sound, storage, wireless communication, or digital camera functions to the notebook. Selec ting a PC Card A T ype I or T ype II PC Card can be used. Zoomed video cards are not supported. Confi gurin g a PC Card à CAUT ION: If yo u install all of the so ft w are or an y of the e nablers pr ov ided b y a P C Car d manufac turer , yo u may not be able to u se other P C Car ds. If y ou ar e instr ucted b y the doc umentation inc luded w ith y our P C Car d to install de v ice dr i ver s: â Install onl y the dev i ce dri v ers f or yo ur operating s y stem . â Do not instal l oth er soft ware , such as card ser v ices, so ck et ser vi c es, or enabler s, that ma y also be supplied b y the PC C ard manufac turer . 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â5 Inser ting a PC Card à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to the PC C ard connec tors: â Use minimal f or ce when ins erting a PC Car d into a P C Car d slot . â Do not mo v e or tr ansport the notebook w hile a PC C ar d is inserted . 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the slot until the card is seated. Inserting a P C Car d 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Stopp ing and Remo v ing a PC Card à CAUT ION: T o pr ev ent l oss of work or an unresponsive s ystem , sto p the P C Car d be for e r emo v ing it . â Stopping a PC Card, e ven if it is not in use, conserv es po wer . 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are supported by the PC Card. 2. T o stop a PC Card, select the Safely Remov e Hardware icon on the taskbar , then select the PC Card. (T o display the Safely Remov e Hardware icon, select in the taskbar the icon for Sho w Hidden Icons.) 3. T o release the PC Card, press the PC Card eject b utton 1 . (If the PC Card b utton does not extend while a PC Card is in the PC Card slot, press the b utton once to extend the b utton, then press the b utton again to release the PC Card.) 4. Gently pull out the PC Card 2 . Rem ovi n g a PC Ca rd 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â7 Using an SD C ard or MMC Ã CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to the SD Car d connectors: â Use minimal f or ce when ins erting an SD Card or MM C into an SD Car d slot . â Do not mo ve or tr ansport the notebook w hile an SD Car d or MMC is inserted . SD (Secure Digital) Cards and MM Cs (multimedia cards) are flash memory cards that provide secure data storage and con venient data sharing. These cards are often used with SD-equipped cameras and PD As as well as notebooks. Th e SD Card features on the notebook support both SD Cards and MMCs. Using t he SD C ard Ligh t The SD Card light turns on when an inserted SD Card or MMC is being accessed. The SD Card light turns of f when an inserted SD Card or MMC is inacti ve or wh en the SD Card slot is empty . Identify ing the SD Car d li ght 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Inser ting an SD C ard or MMC T o insert an SD Card or MMC: 1. Hold the card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the SD Card slot until the card is seated. (The card will extend outw ard slightly beyond the notebook.) Inserting an SD Car d or MMC 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â9 Remo v in g an SD Card or MMC T o remov e an SD Card or MMC: 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are supported by the card. (T o stop a data transfer , select the cancel b utton in the operating system Copying windo w .) 2. Push the card inward until it is released. 3. Pull the card out of the slot. R eleasing and r emo v ing an SD Car d or MMC Disa blin g or Re s tartin g an SD C ard or MMC An inserted SD Card or MMC uses po wer e ven when the card is not in use. Disabling the card conserves po wer . T o disable an inserted SD Card or MMC, double-click the My Computer icon on the W indo ws Desktop, right-click the dri ve assigned to the card, then select Ej ect. (The card is stopped but is not released from the SD Card slot.) T o restart the card, remov e, then reinsert, the card. For instructions, see âInserting an SD Card or MMCâ and âRemoving an SD Card or MMCâ in this chapter . 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Inc reasin g Memor y Y ou can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory) in the notebook with an optional HP-approv ed memory module. The notebook memory slot supports one 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module. Some notebook models ship with a v acant memory slot. On other models the memory slot contains a preinstalled memory module that can be replaced at any time. Disp l a ying M emor y Information When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the hard dri ve space reserv ed for the hibernation f ile. If you experience problems with Hibernation after increasing RAM, verify that your hard dri v e has enough free space for the larger hibernation f ile. â T o display the amount of RAM in the system: Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab . â T o display both the amount of free space on your hard dri ve and the amount of space required by the hibernation f ile: Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Hibernate tab . 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â11 R emo v ing or Inserti ng a Memory Mod ule à W ARNIN G: T o pre v ent e xposur e to elec tri cal shock , access onl y the memory compar tment dur ing this pr ocedur e . The memory compartment and the battery and hard dr i ve ba y s are the onl y us er -accessible inte rnal compartments on the notebook . All other ar eas that r equir e a tool t o access sho uld be opened only b y an HP a uthor i z ed serv ice pr o v ider . à W ARNIN G: T o pre v ent e xposur e to elec tri cal shock and damage t o the notebook , shut do w n the notebook, un plug the pow er cor d , and r emo ve the battery pack bef or e installing a memory module . à CAUT ION: T o pr ev ent elec tr ostati c dischar ge fr om damaging e lectr onic components: bef or e beginning this pr ocedure , dis char ge yo urself o f stati c electr ic ity by touc hing a gr ounded metal obj ect . F or mor e info rmatio n about pr ev enting electr o static damage , r ef er on the Doc umentatio n Libr ary CD to the Re gulator y and Saf ety Notices guide , âElectr os tatic Disc harge â c hapter . 1. Sa ve your work and shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in Hibernation, briefly press the po wer button. If your w ork returns to the screen, sa ve your work, e xit all applications, then shut do wn the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 4. Remov e the battery pack. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades 5. T urn the notebook underside up. 6. Remov e the memory compartment scre w 1 , then lift up and remo ve the memory compartment cov er 2 . Opening the memory compartment 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â13 7. Remov e or insert the memory module. T o remov e a memory module: a. Pull aw ay the retention clips on each side of the module 1 . (The module tilts upward.) b . Grasp the edges of the module and gently pull the module out of the memory slot 2 . c. T o protect a memory module after remov al, place it in an electrostatic-safe container . R emo ving a me mor y module 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades T o insert a memory module: a. Align the ke yed (notched) edge of the module with the ke yed area in the memory slot 1 . b . W ith the module at a 45-de gree angle from the surface of the memory compartment, press the module into the memory slot until it is seated 2 . c. Push the module do wnward until the retention clips snap into place 3 . Inserting a memory module 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â15 8. Align the tabs on the memory compartment cov er with the cov er slots on the notebook, then tilt the cov er do wnward until it is seated 1 . 9. Reinsert and tighten the memory compartment scre w 2 . 10. Replace the battery pack (if you remov ed a battery pack at the beginning of this procedure), reconnect the notebook to external po wer , then restart the notebook. Clo sing the memory compartment 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Conn ec ting an O ption al Ca bl e Loc k â The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not pre vent the product from being mishandled or stolen. An optional cable lock is a security de vice that pre vents unauthorized remov al of the notebook. Loop the cable around a secure object, then insert the cable lock 1 into the security cable slot 2 and lock it with the cable lock ke y 3 . Co nnecting an optional ca ble lock 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â1 9 Sof t w are U pd a tes , Re s torations an d U tilities Cont ents Updating Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â2 Preparing for a Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â2 Downloading and Installing an Up date . . . . . . . . . . . 9â4 Backing Up and Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â7 Setting a System Restore Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â7 Restoring to a System Restore Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â7 Repairing or Reinstalling the Operating System . . . . . . . 9â8 Repairing the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â8 Reinstalling the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â9 Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â10 Installing a Retail Version of an Operating System . . . . 9â11 Using the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â11 Opening the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â11 Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility . . . . . 9â12 Restoring Setup Utility Default Settings . . . . . . . . . 9â12 Exiting the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â12 Using the Support Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â13 Using the Help and Support Window . . . . . . . . . . . 9â13 Using Support Telephone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â14 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Updat ing So ft w a r e For optimal notebook performance and to mak e sure your notebook remains compatible with changing technologies, install the latest versions of the softw are provided with your notebook as they become a v ailable. T o update notebook software: 1. Prepare for any update b y identifying your notebook type, series or family , and model. Prepare for a R OM (read-only memory) update b y identifying the R OM v ersion currently installed on the notebook. 2. Access the updates at the HP W eb site. 3. Do wnload and install the updates. â The notebook R OM stores the BIOS (basic input-output system). The BIOS determines ho w the notebook hardware interacts with the operating system and external de vices and also supports such notebook services as time and date. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â3 Preparing for a Soft w are Upd ate If your notebook connects to a network, consult with your network administrator before installing an y software updates, particularly a R OM update. Accessing N otebook Product Information T o access the updates for your notebook, you will need the follo wing information: â The product cate gory is Notebook. â The product family name and series number are printed on the display bezel. â More complete model information is provided on the serial number label on the underside of the notebook. The product name, notebook mode l, and notebook serial number are also displayed in the same se ction of the Setup utility that displays R OM information, as described in the ne xt section. Accessin g Notebook ROM Info rm ation T o determine whether an a vailable R OM update is a later R OM v ersion than the R OM v ersion currently installed on the notebook, you need to kno w the version of the currently installed R OM. R OM information is displayed in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is a non-W indo ws utility that does not support the T ouchPad. F or complete information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook. 2. Before W indo ws opens and while the F10 = R O M Based Setup prompt is displayed in the lo wer left section of the screen, press F10. 3. Use the arro w ke ys to select the File menu, then press enter . 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities 4. Use the do wn arro w key to select System Info, then press enter . (The R OM v ersion and date are displayed in the System BIOS V ersion f ield.) 5. T o close the System Info windo w and exit the Setup utility without changing any settings: a. Press esc to close the windo w . b . Use the arro w ke ys to select the File menu, then press enter . c. Use the arro w ke ys to select Ignore changes and exit, then press enter . Do w nloa din g and Ins talling an Upd a te Most software at the HP W eb site is packaged in a compressed f ile called a SoftP aq. Some R OM updates may be packaged in a compressed f ile called a RomP aq. Most do wnload packages contai n a file named Readme.txt. A Readme.txt f ile contains detailed descriptiv e, installation, and troubleshooting information about the do wnload. The Readme.txt f iles included with RomPaqs are English only . The follo wing sections provide instructions for do wnloading and installing: â A R OM update. â A SoftPaq containing an update other than a R OM update. 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â5 Do wnloadin g and Installin g a ROM Updat e à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t ser ious damage to the notebook or an unsucce ssful installati on, do w nload and install a R OM updat e only w hile the notebook is connected to reli able e xternal po w er using the A C adapter or a DC cable . (Do not do w nload or install a R OM update w hile the notebook is dock ed or r unning on battery pow er .) During the do w nload and installati on: â Do not unplug the notebook fr om the electr ical outlet . â Do not sh ut dow n the notebook or initi ate Standb y or Hiber nation . â Do not inse r t , r emov e , connect , or disconnec t any de v ice , cable , or cord . Do wn loadi ng a R O M Updat e: 1. Access the page at the HP W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or , visit the HP W eb Site at: http://www .hp.com/support 2. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the R OM update you w ant to download. 3. At the do wnload area: a. Record the date, name, or other identif ier of any R OM update that is later than the R OM currently installed on your notebook. (Y ou may need to identify the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . Record the path to the default or custom location on the hard dri ve to which the R OM package will download. (Y ou may need to access the R OM package after it has been do wnloaded.) c. Follo w the online instructions to do wnload your selection to the hard dri ve. 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Installing a ROM Upda te R OM installation procedures v ary . Follo w any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the do wnload is complete. If no instructions are displayed: 1. Open W indo ws Explorer . T o open W indo ws Explorer from the Start b utton, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > W indo ws Explorer . 2. In the left pane of the W indo ws Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation. (The hard dri v e designation is typically Local Disk C.) Then follo w the path you recorded earlier to the folder on your hard dri ve containing the update. 3. T o begin the installation, open the folder , then double-click the f ile with an .ex e extension, for e xample, Filename.ex e. (The R OM update installation be gins.) 4. T o complete the installation, follo w the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded file from the destination folder . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â7 Do wnloadin g and Installin g a Non -ROM SoftP aq T o update software other than a R O M update: 1. Access the page at the HP W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or , visit the HP W eb site at: http://www .hp.com/support 2. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the SoftPaq you w ant to do wnload. 3. At the do wnload area: a. Write do wn the date, name, or other identifier of the SoftPaq you plan to do wnload. (Y ou will need to identify the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . Follo w the online instructions to do wnload the SoftPaq to the hard dri ve. 4. When the do wnload is complete, open W indo ws Explorer . T o open W indo ws Explorer from the Start b utton, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > W indo ws Explorer . 5. In the left pane of the W indo ws Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation, which is typically Local Disk C > HP . 6. In the HP folder , select the name or number of the softw are package you ha ve do wnloaded. 7. Select the f ile that includes an .ex e extension, for e xample, Filename.ex e. (The installation begins.) 8. T o complete the installation, follo w the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded file from the HP folder . 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities B ac kin g Up an d Re s toring D ata The System Restore utility enables you to safeguard your system f iles and functional configurations b y using System Restore points. System Restore points are restorable, benchmark âsnapshotsâ of your system. The notebook may set System Restore points whene ver you change personal settings or add softw are or hardware. Setting System Restore points manually pro vides additional protection for your system f iles and settings. HP recommends that you set System Restore points: â Before you add or extensi v ely modify software or hardware. â Periodically , whenev er the system is performing optimally . Set ting a S y s tem Re s tore P oin t T o set a System Restore point manually: 1. Select Start > Help & Support > T ools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follo w the on-screen instructions for setting a Restore Point. Re s toring to a S y stem Restore P oin t T o restore the notebook to a System Restore point: 1. Select Start > Help & Support > T ools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follo w the on-screen instructions for restoring the notebook to a Restore Point. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â9 Repairing or Reinstalling t h e Op erating S y stem The OS CD included with your note book can be used to repair or reinstall the operating system. Both operations may take one to 2 hours to complete. â Repairing the operating system preserves your data and settings. â Reinstalling the operating system deletes all f iles on the notebook. After the operating system has been reinstalled, all de vice dri vers must also be reinstalled. HP recommends that you try to restore your system by using the System Restore utility before you consider repairing or reinstalling your operating system. For restoration instructions, see âBacking Up and Restoring Dataâ earlier in this chapter . If a System Restore restoration fail s to restore functionality , first try to repair the operating system. If the repair procedure does not restore functionality , you may need to reinstall the operating system. R epa ir ing the Ope rat ing S y stem T o repair the operating system without deleting your personal data: 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD (included with the notebook) into the optical dri ve. 3. Press and hold the po wer button for 5 seconds to turn of f the notebook. 4. Briefly press the po wer button to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any k ey to boot from CD. (After a fe w minutes, the W elcome to Setup screen is displayed.) 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities 6. Press enter to continue. (A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed.) 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. (The Setup windo w is displayed.) 8. Press R to repair the selected W indo ws installation. (The repair process begins.) After the repair process is complete, which may take up to 2 hours, the notebook restarts in W indo ws. Reinstalling t he O pera ting S y stem If the System Recov ery and operating system repair procedures did not restore functionality to your notebook, it may be necessary to reinstall the operating system. Ã CAUT ION: P e rsonal data and an y so ft w are y ou ha ve ins talled on the notebook w ill be lost dur ing the oper ating s ys tem r einst allation pr ocedur e desc ribed in this s ection . T o pr otect y our data , back u p yo ur M y Documents f older bef or e beginning the pr ocedur e. F or back up info rmati on and instruc tions , select S tart > Help and Support. A lso see âBacking Up and R est oring Data â earli er in this secti on . â During the reinstallation, you may be prompted for your product ke y . The product ke y is displayed on the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label af fix ed to the underside of the notebook. T o reinstall the operating system using the OS CD included with the notebook: 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD into the optical dri ve. 3. Press and hold the po wer button for 5 seconds to turn of f the notebook. 4. Briefly press the po wer button to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any k ey to boot from CD. (After a fe w minutes, the W elcome to Setup screen is displayed.) 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â11 6. Press enter to continue. (A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed.) 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. (The Setup windo w is displayed.) 8. Press esc to continue installing a fresh copy of the operating system. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS f ile system (Quick), then press enter . (A caution is displayed. The caution explains that formatting this dri v e will delete all current f iles.) 12. Press F to format the dri ve. (The reinstallation process be gins.) After the repair process is complete, which may take up to 2 hours, the notebook restarts in W indo ws, and you can be gin to reinstall de vice dri vers. Reinstalling De vice Dri v ers and Ot h er Soft war e After the installation process is complete, you must reinstall dri vers. T o reinstall dri vers using the Dri v er Recov ery CD included with the notebook: 1. While running W indo ws, insert the Dri ver Reco v ery CD into the optical dri ve. If the CD does not open within se veral seconds, select Start > Run. Then type D:\SWSETUP\APPINSTL\SETUP .EXE (where D indicates the optical dri ve). 2. Follo w the on-screen instructions for installing dri v ers. After the dri vers are reinstalled, you must reinstall an y software you added to the notebook. Reinstallation instructions are usually provided on the softw are CD, in the CD package, or at the manufacturerâ s W eb site. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Installin g a Retail V ersion of an Op erating S y stem The W indo ws operating system pro vided on the notebook or on a restoration CD is enhanced by HP . The HP enhancements add po wer and security features and provide supplementary support for external de vices such as dri v es and PC Cards. Ã CAUT ION: Replac ing an oper ating s y stem enhanced b y HP w ith a r etail v ersi on of an oper ating s ys tem w ill r esult in the loss o f all HP enhancements . In some case s, the loss o f these enhancements ma y r esult in an unr esponsi ve s y stem or the lo ss of complete U SB support. Using t h e Setup U tilit y The Setup utility is a preinstalled, R OM-based information and customization utility that can be used e ven when your operating system is not working or will not load. The utility reports information about the notebook and provides settings for startup, password, port, Setup utility appearance, and other preferences. Openin g t he Setu p Utilit y T o access most settings: 1. Start up or restart the notebook. 2. Before W indo ws opens and while the F10 = R O M Based Setup prompt is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen, press F10. On some models, you must start up (not restart) the notebook to access the settings for a hard dri ve passw ord. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â13 Naviga ting an d Sel ec ting in t he S etup U tilit y Because the Setup utility is not W indo ws-based, it does not support the T ouchPad. Na vigation and selection are b y keystrok e. â T o na vigate, use the up and down arro w k eys or tab. â T o select an item, use the arro w keys to select the item, then press enter . â T o close a display b ut remain in the Setup utility , press esc. An on-screen guide to na vigation and selection is displayed at the lo wer edge of most Setup utility submenu screens. T o minimize ke ystrokes b y using the <Alt> K ey Acti v ates Accelerators feature: 1. Press and hold alt. (A letter or number in most on-screen items is highlighted.) 2. Press the ke yboard ke y corresponding to the highlighted letter or number in the item you want to select. For e xample, to select an on-screen OK b utton, press alt. When the âOâ in OK is highlighted, press O. Re s toring S etup Utilit y D efault Set tin gs T o return all Setup utility settings to default v alues, select File menu > Restore Defaults. (Identif ication information, including R OM v ersion information, is retained.) Exiting t he Setup U tilit y The Setup Utility exit options are on the File menu. When you select either option, W indo ws opens after the Setup utility closes. â T o close the utility and sa ve your changes from the current session, select Sa ve changes and e xit. â T o close the utility without sa ving changes from the current session, select Ignore changes and exit. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Using t h e Sup port U tilities If you cannot solve a notebook problem b y using this guide or the supplementary information, including the T r oubleshooting guide, on the Documentation Library CD, you may need to contact HP . Using t he H elp and Su ppor t Windo w Select Start > Help and Support or press the Fn F1 hotke ys. The Help and Support windo w provides access to information about using your operating system and to support areas of the HP W eb site. Most of the support areas are a vailable in se v eral languages, but some links may be una vailable in some re gions. Y ou can use the links in the Help and Support windo w to: â Initiate an online service e vent with a support specialist. â Do wnload the latest dri vers, utilities, and software updates for your notebook. â Obtain information about your notebook such as specif ications, white papers, customer advisories, and all documentation included with your notebook. 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â15 Using Su ppor t T el ephon e Numbers Obtainin g Suppor t T elephone N umbers T o obtain a list of worldwide customer support telephone numbers, use either of the follo wing methods: â Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon. Then, near the lo wer edge of the System Properties windo w , select the Support Information b utton. â Refer to the W orldwide T elephone Numbers booklet (English only) included with your notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center . Preparing to Call T echnical Su pport T o provide the f astest possible resolution of your problem, hav e the notebook and the follo wing information av ailable when you call: â Serial number and model description, which are provided on labels af fix ed to the notebook. â Purchase date on the in v oice. â Conditions under which the problem occurred. â Error messages that ha ve been displayed. â Operating system version number and re gistration number . â T o display the operating system version number and registration number , select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab . â Brand and model of an optional printer . 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 Aâ1 A Spec ifica tions The information in this appendix may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the notebook internationally or in extreme en vironments. Note boo k Dimen sion s Op erating Env ironment Dimension U .S. Metric Height 1.24 inches 3.15 cm Width 14.06 inches 35.7 cm Depth 10 inches 25.4 cm Factor U.S. Metric T emperature Operating 50° to 95° F 10° to 35° C Nonoperating -4° to 140° F -20° to 60° C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating 10% to 90% 10% to 90% Nonoperating 5% to 95% 5% to 95% Maxim um altitude (unpressurize d) Operating 10,000 ft 3,048 m Nonoperating 30,000 ft 9,144 m 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Aâ2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Spe cifica tion s Rated Inp ut P o w er The notebook operates on DC po wer , which can be supplied b y an A C or a DC po wer source. Although the notebook can be po wered from a stand-alone DC po wer source, HP strongly recommends that the notebook be po wered only with an A C adapter or DC cable supplied or appro ved b y HP . An A C adapter pro vided by HP for use with this notebook is capable of accepting A C po wer within the follo wing specif ications: The notebook is capable of accepting DC po wer within the follo wing specifications: This product is designed for IT po wer systems in Norway with phase-to-phase v oltage not exceeding 240 Vrms. Input P o wer Rating Operating v oltage 100â240V A C @ 1.7A - 50â60Hz Operating current 1.5A r ms Operating frequency range 50 to 60Hz Input P o wer Rating Operating v oltage 18.5V DC @ 3.5A - 65W Operating current 4.9A 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Spe cifica tion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 Aâ3 Finding More En v ironmental Inf orma tion The specif ications in this appendix contain information about exposing the notebook to en vironmental extremes. â For similar information about storing battery packs, see the âStoring a Battery Packâ section in Chapter 4. â For information about e xposing the notebook to sunlight, ultra violet light, x-rays, or magnetic fields, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Maintenance , Shipping and T ravel guide. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Aâ4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Spe cifica tion s 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 connector 2â9 A AC adapter 4â11 connecting 1â5, 4â11 disconnecting 4â11 identifying 2â17 power connector 2â12 AC power 1â16, 4â11 adapter AC 1â5, 2â17, 4â11 country-specific modem 2â17, 7â3 , 7â5 Japan-specific outlet 2â17 Agere 7â9 Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) 2â18 Agere modem AT commands 7â9 Aironet, Cisco WLAN products 1â13 airport security devices 5â3 altitude specifications Aâ1 antennas 2â4 , 2â12 antivirus software 1â15 applications key 2â4 applications. See software; software updates AT commands 2â18, 7â9 audio CD. See CD(s) audio-out jack connecting 6â4 identifying 2â8 AutoPlay 5â8 B backup, system 9â8 battery bay identifying 2â13 inserting battery pack 1â3 removing battery pack 4â18 battery light 2â6 battery pack calibrating 4â14 causing CD or DVD write corruption 6â10 charging 1â2, 1â6, 4â11 inserting 1â3 monitoring charge 4â12 removing 4â18 storing 4â16 when to remove 4â3 battery power conserving 4â17 low-battery conditions 4â13 running notebook on 4â11 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ2 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x switching to and from 4â11 when to use 1â14, 4â4 BIOS (basic input output system) 9â2 Bluetooth device 1â11 boot order 5â10 button(s) PC Card eject 2â11, 8â6 power 2â5 TouchPad 2â3, 3â3 volume 2â7, 6â2 wireless device 1â11, 2â6, 2â8 See also key; latch; switch, display C cable AC adapter 1â5 audio 6â5 DC 2â12 modem 2â9, 2â16, 7â2 network 2â16, 7â11 S-Video 6â5 See also cord, power cable lock, connecting 8â16 calibration, battery 4â14 caps lock light 2â6 card and socket services, PC Card 8â4 card. See memory, modules supported; PC Card; SD Card CD drive. See drives CD(s) CD-R vs. CD-RW 6â10 copying 6â9 creating 6â9 playing, with Windows Media Player 6â7 playing, with WinDVD 6â7 starting from 5â10 See also drive media Certificate of Authenticity label 2â15 , 9â10 certification, WiFi 1â13 Cisco Aironet WLAN products 1â13 Cisco Compatible Extension program 1â13 commands, AT 2â18, 7â9 compartment, memory 2â13, 8â10 connector(s) 1394 2â9 docking 2â14 drive 5â3 external monitor 2â9 infrared port 2â12, 7â13 modem 2â9, 7â3 network 2â9, 7â10 parallel 2â9 power 2â12 USB 2â9, 8â2 conservation, power 4â17 cord, power connecting 1â5 identifying 2â16 surge protection 1â14 See also cable country-specific modem adapter connecting 7â5 identifying 2â17 when to use 7â3 critical low-battery condition 4â13 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ3 currency formats, setting 1â10 customer support 2â18, 9â14 D data compression algorithm 7â2 date, setting the 1â10 DC cable 1â8, 2â12 designation, drive 5â2 device drivers, reinstalling 9â11 dialing mode 7â7 dimensions, notebook Aâ1 disc, diskette. See drive media display release latch 2â2 display switch 2â5 function, changing 4â9 function, default 4â6 identifying 4â5 display, internal brightness 3â7 opening 1â4 switching image 3â6 docking connector, cover 2â14 drive designation 5â2 drive media affected by airport security 5â3 cancelling AutoPlay on 5â8 caring for 5â3 displaying contents of 5â8 inserting, removing CD or DVD 5â5 types and terms 5â2 drivers, reinstalling 9â11 drives adding to system 5â4 affected by airport security 5â3 avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using optical 5â9 IDE drive light 5â4 inserting, removing media 5â5 shipping 5â3 starting from 5â10 types and terms 5â2 USB 8â2 See also hard drive, internal DVD drive. See drives DVD(s) playing, with WinDVD 6â7 region settings 6â8 starting from 5â10 See also drive media E Easy CD Creator CD Copier, when to use 6â9 DirectCD, when to use 6â9 features 6â9 formats 6â11 obtaining 6â9 preparing to use 6â10 prompt, UDF 6â10 settings 6â12 source drive vs. destination drive 6â10 eject button optical drive 5â6 PC Card 8â6 electric shock warning 1â16 electrical storm, safety issues 1â14 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 5â3 , 8â11 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ4 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x emergency shutdown procedures 1â10 , 4â6 enablers, PC Card 8â4 End User License Agreement 1â8 environmental specifications Aâ1 error message No Dial Tone 7â8 Playback Of Content From This Region Not Permitted 6â7 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 5â3 , 8â11 exhaust vent 2â10 external monitor connecting 8â2 connector 2â9 switching image 3â6 F fan, vents 2â10, 2â14 FCC notice 1â16 FDD (floppy disk drive) 5â2 flash memory card 8â7 flash RAM card 8â7 Fn key changing Standby function 4â9 hotkeys function 3â4 identifying 2â4 keypad functions 3â10 Standby function 4â5 video device function 6â6 function keys 2â4, 3â4 H hard drive bay identifying 2â13 replacing hard drive 5â10 hard drive, internal defined 5â2 displaying amount of free space on 8â10 replacing 5â10 retaining screws 5â11, 5â14 space on, required for Hibernation file 8â10 See also drives headphones 6â4 Help and Support window 3â6, 9â14 Hibernation avoiding when playing media 5â9 changing configuration during 4â2 controls and indicators 4â5 defined 4â2 identifying 5â10 initiated during critical low-battery condition 4â13 initiating 2â5, 4â8 resuming from 4â8 setting preferences 4â9 when to use 4â2 hotkeys changing function of Fn F5 4â9 identifying 3â4 procedures 3â6 Quick Reference 3â5 hotkeys commands access Help and Support 3â6 display brightness 3â7 initiate QuickLock 3â7 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ5 initiate Standby 3â7 , 4â7 media commands 3â8 Open Internet Explorer 3â6 Quick Reference 3â5 switch image 3â6 hub, USB 8â2 humidity specifications Aâ1 I IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light 5â4 identifying components additional 2â16 display 2â2 IEC 60950 compliance 1â16 IEEE 802.11 compliance 1â13 infrared port 2â12, 7â13 International Telecommunications Union (ITU) 7â2 InterVideo WinDVD error message 6â7 managing region settings 6â8 playing video CDs and DVDs 6â7 ITU (International Telecommunications Union) 7â2 J jack audio-out 2â8, 6â4 microphone 2â8, 6â4 RJ-11 2â9, 7â3 RJ-45 2â9, 7â11 S-Video 2â8, 2â9, 6â5 Japan-specific modem adapter 2â17 K key applications 2â4 Fn 2â4 function (F1, F2, etc.) 2â4 hotkeys 3â4 keypad 2â4, 3â9 num lock 3â10 Windows logo 2â4 See also button(s); latch; switch, display keyboard language 1â10 L label Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 2â15, 9â10 modem approvals 2â15 product identification 2â15 system 2â15 wireless certification 2â15 language choosing during setup 1â8 selecting keyboard 1â10 latch battery pack locking 4â19 battery pack release 2â13 display release 2â2 See also button(s); switch, display light(s) battery 2â6 caps lock 2â6 hard drive 2â6 IDE drive 5â4 mute 2â6 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ6 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x num lock 3â10 power/standby 2â6 wireless device 1â11, 2â6 line-out jack 2â8, 6â4 lock, security cable 8â16 locked system emergency shutdown procedures 1â10, 4â6 locking latches, battery pack 4â19 lock-up, system 2â5 low-battery conditions identifying 4â13 M Maintenance, Shipping and T ravel guide 2â18 media hotkeys 3â8 Media Player, Windows 6â7 media, drive affected by airport security 5â3 cancelling AutoPlay on 5â8 caring for 5â3 displaying contents of 5â8 inserting, removing CD or DVD 5â5 types and terms 5â2 See also drives memory compartment 2â13 displaying amount of 8â10 increasing RAM 8â10 module, removing or inserting 8â11 modules supported 8â10 microphone jack 2â8 microphone, connecting 6â4, 8â2 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 2â15 mode, dialing 7â7 model, identifying notebook 9â3 modem Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) 2â18 approvals label 2â15 cable 2â16 connecting 7â3 country configurations 7â6 country-specific adapter 2â17 Modem Command Guidelines (Advanced Users Only) 2â18 specifications 7â2 speed 7â2 troubleshooting travel connections 7â7 virus protection 1â15 monitor, external connecting 8â2 external monitor connector 2â9 switching display 3â6 mouse, external connecting 8â2 USB connectors 2â9 multimedia card 8â7 N network cable 2â16 connecting 7â11 RJ-45 jack 2â9 specifications 7â10 speed 7â10 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ7 No Dial Tone error message 7â8 Norton AntiVirus 2003 1â15 notebook model, family, type, and serial number 9â3 NTSC television format 6â6 num lock key 3â10 light 2â6 number Product Key 2â15 serial 2â15 numeric keypad 3â9 O opening the notebook 1â4 operating environment specifications Aâ1 operating system installing retail version of 9â12 loading 4â6 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 2â15 Product Key number 2â15 reinstalling 9â9 repairing 9â9 shutting down 4â6 optical disc. See CD(s); DVD(s) optical drive avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using 5â9 boot order 5â10 identifying 2â11 See also drives P PAL, PAL-M television formats 6â6 parallel connector 2â9 passwords 9â12 PC Card configuring 8â4 functions 8â4 inserting, removing 8â5 stopping 8â6 types available 8â4 PC Card eject button 2â11 pointing device 3â3 port, infrared 2â12, 7â13 power button 2â5 connecting the notebook to external 1â5 conservation 4â2, 4â17 controls 4â5 cord 2â16 emergency shutdown procedures 4â6 Hibernation procedures 4â6 low-battery conditions 4â13 power connector 2â12 power/standby light 2â6 rated input Aâ2 setting preferences 4â9 shutting down the notebook 1â10 Standby procedures 4â7 surge protection 1â14 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ8 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x switching between AC and battery 4â11 turning on the notebook 1â7 See also battery pack power button function, changing 4â9 identifying 4â5 resetting with 4â6 power connector connecting 1â5 identifying 2â12 power cord connecting 1â5 surge protection 1â14 Power Meter 4â12 power, AC 1â16 power/standby light 4â5 Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) 7â12 preloaded utilities Bluetooth device 1â12 displaying descriptions 1â9 HP setup and configuration utility for wireless LAN devices 1â13 Product Key number 2â15 projector connecting 2â9, 8â2 switching display 3â6 PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment) 7â12 R RAM (Random Access Memory) 8â10 recovery CD 2â18 region settings currency, date, language, time 1â10 DVD 6â8 modem 7â6 Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide 2â18 regulatory information modem approvals label 2â15 notices 1â16 Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide 2â18 system label 2â15 wireless certification label 2â15 release latch battery pack 2â13 display 2â2 repairing the operating system 9â9 reset (emergency shutdown procedures) 1â10, 4â6 resolution, screen 1â10 restoring software 2â18 RJ-11 telephone jack connecting 7â3 identifying 2â9 modem cable 2â16 RJ-45 network jack connecting 7â11 identifying 2â9 network cable 2â16 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ9 ROM defined 9â2 determining current version of 9â3 downloading and installing 9â5 obtaining updates 9â4 RomPaq, downloading 9â4 S Safety & Comfort Guide 1â16, 2â18 SD Card 8â7 security cable lock, connecting 8â16 slot 2â12 serial number, notebook 2â15 , 9â3 series, notebook 9â3 Setup utility 9â12 shutdown procedures 1â10, 4â6 sleep button 3â7, 4â9 Sleep. See Standby slot memory 8â10 PC Card 2â11 SD Card 8â7 security cable 2â12 socket services, PC Card 8â4 SoftPaq described 9â4 downloading and installing 9â7 software antivirus protection 1â15 AutoPlay 5â8 Easy CD Creator 6â9 Help and Support window 9â14 infrared 7â13 installing optional 1â9 modem 7â6 network 7â12 Norton AntiVirus 2003 1â15 Power Meter 4â12 regional settings 1â10 reinstalling 9â9, 9â11 repairing 9â9 restoring 2â18 RomPaq 9â4 Setup utility 9â12 SoftPaq 9â4 UDF Reader 6â10 updating preloaded software 9â2 Windows Media Player 6â7 WinDVD 6â7 software updates downloading and installing 9â5 , 9â7 obtaining 9â4 preparing for 9â3 speakers, external 6â4 speakers, internal 6â3 specifications dimensions Aâ1 modem 7â2 network 7â10 operating environment Aâ1 rated input power Aâ2 Standby avoiding when playing media 5â9 avoiding when using infrared 7â14 controls and indicators 4â5 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ10 Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde x initiated during critical low-battery condition 4â13 initiating 3â7, 4â7 power/standby light 2â6 resuming from 4â7 setting preferences 4â9 S-Video connections 6â5 jack 2â9 switch, display 2â5 system label 2â15 system lock-up 1â10, 4â6 System Restore utility 9â8 T technical support 9â14 notebook documentation 2â18 telephone (RJ-11) jack connecting 7â3 identifying 2â9 modem cable 2â16 telephone numbers, service and support 9â14 television changing color format 6â6 connecting audio 6â4 connecting video 6â5 temperature notebook surface 1â16 specifications Aâ1 storage, battery pack 4â16 1394 connector 2â9 time, setting 1â10 TouchPad components 3â3 setting preferences 3â3 traveling with notebook battery pack temperature considerations 4â16 environmental specifications Aâ1 modem approvals label 2â15 serial number 2â15 wireless certification label 2â15 traveling with the notebook modem country configurations 7â6 regional settings 1â10 troubleshooting modem travel connections 7â7 T r oubleshooting guide 2â18 turning off notebook 1â10, 4â6 turning on notebook 1â7, 4â6 U UDF Reader 6â10 unresponsive system, emergency shutdown procedures 1â10, 4â6 USB connectors, identifying 2â9 devices, connecting 8â2 utilities, preloaded displaying descriptions 1â9 HP wireless setup and configuration 1â13 installing 1â9 See also software 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ11 V VCR audio-out jack function 6â4 connecting 6â5 vents, fan 2â10, 2â14 video CDs, DVDs. See CD(s); DVD(s) video device connecting audio 6â5 S-Video jack 6â5 turning on and off 6â6 viruses, computer 1â15 volume, adjusting 6â2 W WiFi certification 1â13 Windows applications key 2â4 Windows logo key 2â4 Windows Media Player accessing with Digital Audio button 6â7 using with audio CDs WinDVD error message 6â7 managing region settings 6â8 playing video CDs and DVDs 6â7 wireless device button 1â11 , 2â8 certification label 2â15 identifying 1â11 light 1â11, 2â6 setting up 1â11 WLAN products, Cisco Aironet 1â13 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ12 Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde x 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
© 2003 He wlett-Packard De velopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indo ws are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. SD Logo is a trademark. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. St ar tup and R ef er ence Gui de HP Note book Ser ies F irs t E dition Sept ember 2003 R efe re nce Number : zt3000 Document P ar t Nu mber: 3 4 5 5 61-001 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Cont ent s 1S t a r t u p 2 Hardware 3 Keyboard 4P o w e r 5 Drives and Drive Media 6 Multimedia 7 Communications 8 Hardware Options and Upgrades 9 Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities A Specifications Index 345561-001.book Page ii M o nd ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â1 Pa r t - 1 Star tup This Startup and Refer ence Guide provides information about setting up and using your notebook. â T o set up your notebook hardw are and software for the f irst time, follo w the procedures in this âStartupâ part. â T o learn more about using your notebook, refer to the remaining âReferenceâ part of this book. T o f ind information about a specif ic topic: â Refer to the chapter Contents on the f irst page of each chapter , or â Refer to the Index. The illustrations throughout this book sho w the features and procedures for se veral notebook models. Whene v er more than one notebook is illustrated, refer only to the illustration(s) for your notebook model. 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP art 1 Startup Set ting Up the Hard w ar e T o set up the notebook for the f irst time, you need the notebook, the A C adapter 1 , the po wer cord 2 , and the battery pack 3 . During hardware setup, you will: â Insert the battery pack into the notebook, so the battery can begin to char ge as soon as the notebook is connected to ext e rn a l p owe r . â Open the notebook. â Connect the notebook to external po wer and turn on the notebook. Y ou will then proceed to software setup. Identify ing the A C adapt er , the po w er cor d , and the bat tery pac k (P o w er cords v ary by r egion and coun tr y .) 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â3 Inser ting a B a t ter y P ac k T o insert the battery pack into the battery bay: 1. T urn the notebook underside up on a flat surf ace. 2. Insert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook 1 . 3. T ilt the battery pack do wnward until it snaps into place 2 . Inserting a battery pack à CAUT ION: T o ensur e that the cor r ect dr iv ers load and t o pre v ent f ile corr uption or damage t o components , do not re mov e the battery pack until the notebook ha s been co nnected t o exte rnal A C po w er . 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP art 1 Startup Openin g t he Notebook T o open the notebook: 1. Place the notebook display side up on a flat surface near an electrical outlet. 2. Slide the display release latch 1 as you raise the display 2 . Opening the notebook 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â5 Conn ec ting t he N otebook to External P o w er T o connect the notebook to e xternal A C po wer: 1. Plug the A C adapter cable into the po wer connector 1 . 2. Plug the po wer cord into the A C adapter 2 , then into an electrical outlet 3 . When the notebook is recei ving external po wer , the battery light 4 turns on. Co nnecting the notebook t o ext ernal po w er (P o w er cor ds and outlets var y by r egion and countr y .) 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP art 1 Startup Cha r g i ng a N e w Batt ery P a ck The battery pack you inserted earli er begins to char ge as soon as the notebook is connected to extern al po wer . Char ge status is indicated by the battery light. â The battery light is on and orang e while a battery pack inserted into the notebook is charging. â The battery light is on and gr een when a battery pack inserted into the notebook is fully char ged. HP recommends that you lea ve the notebook connected to external po wer until the battery pack is fully char ged and the battery light turns green. (A partially charged ne w battery pack can run the notebook after initial software setup is complete, b ut battery charge displays will not be accurate until the ne w battery pack has been fully charged.) Identify ing the battery light 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â7 T urnin g On t h e Notebook T o turn on the notebook, press the po wer b utton 1 . When the notebook turns on, the po wer/standby light 2 turns on, and you are prompted to begin softw are setup. T urning on the notebook If the notebook does not turn on: â Make sure that the A C adapter is securely plugged into an electrical outlet. â Make sure that the outlet is pro viding po wer . (T o conf irm that the outlet is providing po wer , plug another device into the outlet.) â If you ha ve installed a battery pack, make sure that the battery pack is f irmly seated. â Refer to the W orldwide T elephone Numbers booklet (English only) included with the notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center . 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 1 Startup Setting Up th e Softw ar e à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t file co rru ption and ensur e that the cor rec t dri v ers ar e installed , install so ft w are onl y w hen the notebook is connect ed to e xternal po w er thr ough the A C ada pter . During the inst allation: â Do not unplug the n otebook fr om e xter nal po wer . â Do not sh ut dow n the notebook or initi ate Standb y or Hiber nation . â Do not inse r t , r emov e , connect , or disconnec t any de v ice , cable , or cord . Installin g B asi c Soft war e When the notebook is connected to external po wer and turned on for the f irst time, a prompt to set up the operating system and other basic software is displayed on the screen. Before responding to the prompt and proceeding through the on-screen instructions, read the follo wing caution and other installation information. â After beginning the softw are setup, you must complete the entire process without interruption. Setup time v aries. â If you are prompted to select a language, choose carefully . On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and ca nnot be restored during the installation. â Regional settings and most other preferences that you may select as you set up the basic software can be selected or changed later , after the operating system is installed. â When you are prompted to accept the End User License Agreement, you must choose Accept to continue the software setup. â During setup, it is normal for so me notebook models to pause occasionally for up to 2 minutes and to restart se veral times. These pauses and restarts occur on ly during initial software setup. They will not occur during standard W indo ws startups. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â9 Installin g O ptional Sof t w are Step-by-step instructions for installing and using man y of the applications and utilities included with the notebook are provided later in this guide. If you prefer to install optional software no w , the follo wing information may be helpful. T o install an application or a utility from a CD, refer to the instructions included with the CD . If printed instructions are not included in the CD package, they may be displayed on the screen when the CD is inserted. T o vie w or install preloaded utilities or applications, select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. Then: â T o display the descriptions and space requirements of a preloaded item without installing it, select the Next b utton, then select an item. After vie wing the information that is displayed, select the Cancel b utton. â T o install a preloaded item, select the check box for the item, select the Next b utton, then follo w the instructions on the screen. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup Set ting Region al and Dis pl a y Prefer ences K eyboard language and other re gional preferences, such as time, date, and currency format, are set in the Re gional Options windo w of the operating system. T o access the Regional Options windo w , select Start > Control Panel > Date, T ime, Language and Regional Options icon. Screen appearance settings are accessed from the operating system Appearance and Themes windo w . T o access the Appearance and Themes windo w , select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes icon. T o access the settings that control the size of the items displayed on the screen, select the Change Resolution task. T urning O f f t he Notebook T urn of f the notebook b y using the W indo ws shutdo wn procedure: Select Start > T urn Of f Computer > T urn Off. If the notebook does not respond, try the follo wing emergenc y shutdo wn procedures in the sequence provided: â If the notebook is running Microsoft W indo ws XP Professional: press ctrl alt delete. Select the Shut Do wn b utton, then select Shut down from the drop do wn list. â Press and hold do wn the po wer button for at least 4 seconds. â Unplug the notebook from external po wer and remo ve the battery pack. For instructions see âReplacing a Battery P ackâ in Chapter 4. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â11 Setting Up a W ir eless De vice Y our notebook model may ha ve a Bluetooth de vice, a wireless LAN de vice, or no wireless de vices. T o display the names of any preinstalled wireless LAN de vices in De vice Manager: Select Start > My Computer . Right-click on the My Computer windo w , then select Properties > Hardware tab > De vice Manager > Network Adapters. Using t he Wireless De vice Ligh t and Bu t ton The wireless de vice light 1 av ailable on select models indicates whether integrated wireless de vices ha ve been turned on or of f with the wireless de vice button 2 . The inte grated wireless de vices may include a Bluetooth de vice, another wireless de vice, or both wireless de vices. An inte grated wireless de vice must be turned on with the wireless de vi ce button before the wireless de vice can be set up. Identify ing the w ir eles s dev i ce light and button 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup â When the wireless de vice button is turned on, the wireless de vice light turns on and the integrated wireless de vices are hardware enabled. â When the wireless de vice button is turned of f, the wireless de vice light turns of f and the integrated wireless de vices are hardware disabled. The light remains on if either or both wireless de vices are turned of f by using the de vice softwa re rather than by using the wireless de vice button. Set ting U p a Bluetoot h De vice T o set up a Bluetooth de vice, install the Bluetooth software preloaded on your notebook: 1. T o enable the Bluetooth de vice and the software setup, press the wireless de vice button. (The wireless de vice light turns on.) 2. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. Select the Bluetooth software, then follo w the setup instructions on the screen. For more conf iguration information and usage instructions, refer on the Documentation LibraryâBluetooth CD included with your notebook to the Bluetooth Getting Started guide and to the Bluetooth Userâ s Guide . Set ting Up a Wir eless De vice T o set up an Integrated W ireless LAN 54g Network Adapter , follo w the instructions at the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com for do wnloading and installing the SoftPaq for the Inte grated W ireless LAN 54g Netw ork Adapter . F or general information about accessing, do wnloading, and installing a SoftPaq, see Chapter 9, in section âUpdating Software. â T o set up any other wireless de vice, you may use the HP setup and conf iguration utility preloaded on your notebook or the default W indows XP wireless netw ork connection utility . 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â13 The HP setup and conf iguration utility supports legac y operating systems and Cisco Compatible Extension program features. The Cisco Compatible Extensions program for WLAN de vices assures compatibility between Cisco Aironet WLAN products and certain notebook models through extensi v e independent testing. Because a Cisco Compat ible wireless de vice is IEEE 802.11 compliant and W iFi certif ied, it is fully compatible with other W iFi certif ied products. For optimal wireless de vice functionality , HP recommends that you set up the de vice using the HP setup and configuration utility . â T o set up a wireless LAN de vice using the default W indo ws XP wireless network connection utility: 1. Press the wireless de vice button. (The wireless de vice light turns on.) 2. Follo w the instructions a v ailable through Start > W indo ws Help and Support. â T o set up a wireless LAN de vice using the HP setup and conf iguration utility , you must first disable the W indows XP wireless network connection utility , then install the HP setup and conf iguration utility . 1. T o disable the W indo ws XP wireless network connection utility: a. Select Start > Control P anel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections. b . Right-click W ireless Netw ork Connection, then select Properties. c. On the W ireless Netw orks tab, clear the Use W indo ws to conf igure my wireless network settings check box. d. Select OK. The W indo ws XP wireless network connection utility remains disabled until you enable it again. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup 2. Press the wireless de vice button. (The wireless de vice light turns on.) 3. T o install the HP setup and conf iguration utility: Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup > WLAN Utility Installer , then select OK. 4. T o install and conf igure your wireless device, follo w the installation and conf iguration instructions on the screen. Accessing Ins truc tions f or Usin g a Wir eles s De vice Instructions for installing and using an Integrated W ireless LAN 54g Network Adapter are included with the Inte grated W ireless LAN 54g Network Adapter SoftP aq av ailable at the HP W eb site at http://www .hp.com. Instructions for any other inte grated wireless de vice included with your model are provided with your notebook. Depending on the wireless de vice, the instructions may be provided in a Help f ile within the device softw are or in documentation included with your notebook. Protectin g t he N otebook from Po w e r S u r g e s T o protect the notebook from the po wer surges that may be caused by an uncertain po wer supply or an electrical storm: â Plug the notebook po wer cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector . Surge protectors are a v ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. â Provide sur ge protection on the cable that connects a modem to the telephone line. â During an electrical storm, run the notebook on battery po wer or shut do wn the notebook and disconnect the po wer cord. 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
St ar tup Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 1 1â15 Protectin g t he N otebook Agains t Vir us e s When you use the notebook for email, network, or Internet access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, your applications, or your utilities or cause them to function abnormally . Anti virus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair damage they ha v e caused. T o provide protection against ne wly discov ered viruses, anti virus software must be updated. The Norton AntiV irus 2003 software installed on your notebook provides 60 days of free virus updates. For Norton AntiV irus 2003 instructions and more information about virus updates, refer to the Help f ile within the application or select Start > Help and Support. 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
1â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 1 Startup Using t h e Notebook Sa f ely This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital de vice, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. For more safety and re gulatory information refer to the Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide on the Documentation Library CD and to the printed W ir eless Device Re gulatory Notices document included with your notebook. The Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide also includes information about protecting the notebook against electrostatic dischar ge. Ã W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of electr i c shock or damage to y our equipment: â P lug the po wer cor d into an electr ic al outlet that is easily acce ssible at all times . â Disconnect po w er fr om the pr oduct b y unplugging the po w er cor d fr om the e lectr ical outle t. â If pr o vi ded with a thr ee -conductor po w er cor d w ith a three-pin attachment plug , plug the cor d into a gr ounded (earthed) outlet. Do not disable the po we r cor d gro unding pin. T he gr ounding pi n is an important saf ety featur e . Ã W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of s eri ous inj ury , read the Safety & Comf ort Guide . It desc r ibes pr oper w orks tation s etup and pr oper pos tur e , health, and w or k habits f or computer us ers. T he Saf ety & Comf ort Guide also pr o vi des important elec tri cal and mechani cal safety inf ormatio n. T his guide is a vailable on the W e b at http://www .hp.com/ergo, on the har d dr iv e , or on the Doc umentati on Libr ary CD that is included w ith the pr oduct . Ã W ARNIN G: T his notebook is designed to r un demanding applicati ons at full po w er . As a result o f incr eased po w er consumpti on, it is nor mal fo r the notebook to feel w arm or hot w hen used continuo usly . T o a vo id potenti al discomfort or burns , do not bloc k the air ve nts or use the notebook on y our lap f or e xtended per iods. T he notebook compli es w ith the user -acce ssible surface tem peratur e limits de fined b y the Inter national S tandard f or Saf ety of Infor mation T echno logy E quipmen t (IE C 60 9 5 0) . 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 Pa r t 2 Re fe re n ce 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef ere nce GuideâP ar t 2 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â1 2 Ha r d w a r e Cont ents Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Keys and Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6 Audio Buttons and Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â8 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â9 Connectors and Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â9 Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â10 Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â11 Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â12 Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â13 Bays and Memory Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â13 Docking Connector and Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â14 Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â15 Additional Standard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â16 Cables and Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â16 Adapters and Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â17 Restoration and Documentation CDs . . . . . . . . . . . 2â18 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Disp l a y Displa y Displa y release latch Opens the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â3 To p To u c h Pa d To p : To u c h P a d 1 T ouchP ad on/off button Enables/disab les the T ouchP ad. 2 T ouchP ad* Mov es the pointer and selects or activ ates items on the screen. 3 T ouchP ad light On: T ouchP ad is enabled. 4 T ouchP ad scroll zones (2)* Scroll upward or do wnward. 5 Left and right T ouchP ad but t on s * Function lik e the left and r ight buttons on an e xter nal mouse. *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf ormation about changing the functions of T ouchP ad f eatures, see âSetting T ouchP ad Preferencesâ in Chapter 3. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Keys a n d A n t e n n a T op: Ke ys and Antenna 1 Fn ke y Combines with other ke ys to perf or m system tasks. F or e xample, pressing Fn F7 increases screen brightness. 2 Function ke ys (12) P erf or m s ystem and application tasks. When combined with the Fn k ey , the function ke ys F1 and F3 through F12 perf or m additional tasks as hotke ys. 3 K e ypad ke ys (15) Can be used like the k e ys on an e xter nal numeric ke ypad. 4 Applications ke y Displa ys a shor tcut menu for items beneath the pointer . 5 Antenna (av ailab le on select models and not visible from outside the notebook)* Sends and receiv es wireless device signals. 6 Windows logo k ey Displa ys the Windows Star t menu. *The notebook has 2 antennas. The seco nd is on the right side of the notebook. F or optimal transmissions, k eep the areas immediately ov er the antennas free from obstructions. 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â5 Po w e r C o n t r o l s T op: P o wer Controls 1 P o wer b utton* When the notebook is: â Off , press to tur n on the notebook. â On, briefly press to initiate Hiber nation. â In Standb y , br iefly press to resume from Standb y . â In Hiber nation, briefly press to restore from Hiber nation. â If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. 2 Displa y s witch* â If the notebook is closed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the notebook is opened while in Standby , tur ns on the notebook (resumes from Standby). *This table describes def ault settings. F or inf ormation about changing the function of the pow er button or displa y s witch, see âSetting P owe r Control Pref erencesâ in Chapter 4. 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Ligh ts T op: Lights 1 Num lock light On (green): Num loc k or the inter nal ke ypad is on. 2 Caps loc k light On (green): Caps loc k is on. 3 Mute light On (orange): V olume is muted. 4 Wireless de vice light (a vailab le on select models) On: The wireless de vice button is tur ned on and an integrated wireless de vice is hardware enab led. 5 Batter y light On: The no tebook is receiving adequate e xter nal pow er . â On orange: A batter y pac k is charging. â On green: A batter y pac k is fully charged. â Flashing: A batter y pac k is malfunctioning and ma y need to be replaced. 6 IDE (Integrated Driv e Electronics) drive light On: The inter nal hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. 7 P o wer/standb y light On: Notebook is tur ned on. Flashing: Notebook is in Standby . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â7 Audio B ut tons an d Speak er s T op: A udio Buttons and Speakers 1 Increase v olume button Increases system vo lume. 2 Decrease v olume button Decreases system vo lume. 3 Mute button Mutes or restores v olume. 4 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Har d w ar e Fron t P an e l Fr ont P anel 1 SD (Secure Digital) Card light On: An SD Card or MMC is being accessed. 2 SD Card slot Suppor ts SD Cards and MMCs (multimedia cards). 3 Microphone jack Connects an op tional monaural or stereo microphone. 4 A udio-out jack Connects optional headphones or pow ered stereo speakers . Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. 5 Wireless de vice button (av ailab le on select models) On: The wireless de vice light is on and an integrated wireless de vice is hardware enab led. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â9 Rea r P an e l Con nector s a nd Jacks Rear P anel: Connectors and Jac ks 1 Exter nal monitor connector Connects an optional V GA e xter nal monitor or projector . 2 S-Video jack Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 3 USB connectors (3) Connect optional 2.0-compliant USB de vices. 4 RJ-45 network jack Connects an Ethern et network cab le. (An Ether net network cable is included with select models.) 5 RJ-11 telephone jack Connects a modem cable . (A modem cab le is included with select models.) 6 P arallel connector (a v ailable on select models) Connects an optional parallel de vice such as a printer . 7 1394 connector Co nnects an optional 1394 device such as a camcorder . 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Ve n t Rear P anel: V ent Exhaust v ent* Provides airflow to cool internal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . *The notebook has 3 v ents. The other v ents are on the underside of the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â11 Left Si de Left Side 1 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. 2 PC Card eject button Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. 3 Optical drive* Suppor ts an optical disc. *The type of optical drive , fo r exampl e a CD , D VD , or combination CD/D VD drive , v ar ies by model. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Righ t Side Right Side 1 Antenna (av ailab le on select models and not visible from outside the notebook) * Sends and receiv es wireless device signals. 2 Infrared por t Provides wireless comm unication between the notebook and an optional IrD A-compliant de vice. 3 P o wer connector Connects an A C adapter cable . 4 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook. *The notebook has 2 antennas. The seco nd is on the left side of the notebook. F or optimal transmissions, k eep the areas immediately ov er the antennas free from obstructions. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â13 Under side Bay s and Mem or y Com par tmen t Underside: Ba ys and Memory Compar tment 1 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pack . 2 Batter y pack release latch Relea ses a batter y pac k from the batter y ba y . 3 Memor y compar tment Contains 1 memor y slot for an optional 128-MB, 256-MB , 512-MB , or 1024-MB memor y module. As shipped, the memor y slot ma y be filled with a replaceab le memor y module or v acant, depending on the notebook model. 4 Hard drive ba y Holds the inter nal hard dr iv e. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Doc king C onnec tor and V ents Underside: Doc king Connector and V ent 1 Dock ing connector* Connects t he notebook to an optional por t replicator . 2 V ents (3) Allow airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, use the notebook only on hard surf aces which cannot obstruct the vents . Do not allow a soft surf ace , such as bedding, clothing or a thick rug, to bloc k airflow . *As shipped, the docking co nnector is not visible . The docking connector is beneath the docking connector co ve r , which protects the connector when the connector is not in use. 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â15 Labels The labels af fix ed to the noteboo k and some notebook components provide information you may need when troubleshooting system problems or tra veling internationally with the notebook. â The Microsoft Certif icate of Authenticity label contains the Product K ey number . Y ou may need this number to update or troubleshoot the operating system. â The system label provides re gulatory information about the notebook. â The product identif ication label contains the serial number of the notebook and a code describing the original conf iguration of the notebook. Y ou will need the notebook serial number if you call customer support. â The modem approv als label, which is af f ixed to an optional internal modem, provides re gulatory information. â W ireless certif ication labels, which are specif ic to various types of optional wireless de vices, are af fix ed to the notebook and provide re gulatory information. 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Additional Stan dard C ompon ents The components included with the notebook v ary by re gion, country , notebook model, and the optional hardware ordered. The follo wing sections identify the standard external accessories and components included with most notebook models. Ca bl es and Cord Additional Standar d Components: Cables and Cor d 1 Modem cab le (included with select models) Connects a modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter . â A modem cable has a 6-pin, RJ-11 telephone connec tor at each end. 2 Network cable (included with select models) Connects the notebook to an Ether net network jack. â A network cable has an 8-pin, RJ-45 network connector at each end. 3 P o wer cord* Connects an A C adapter to an A C electr ical outlet. *P o wer cords v ar y in appear ance b y region and countr y . 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
H a rdwa re Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 2â17 Ada pters and Ba t ter y P ac k Additional Standar d Components: Adapters and Battery P ack 1 A C adapter Conv er ts A C pow er to DC power . 2 Countr y-specific modem adapter (included by region as required) Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack. 3 Japan-specific outlet adapter (Japan only) Connects the A C adapter to a 2-prong electrical outlet. 4 Batter y pack Runs the notebook when the notebook is not connected to e xter nal powe r . 345561-001.book Page 17 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
2â18 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Har d w ar e Re s toration and Doc ume ntation CDs CDs for repairing or reinstalling software and for obtaining supplementary information about the notebook are included with the notebook. â For information about restoring, repairing, or reinstalling software, refer to Chapter 9, âSo ftw are Updates, Restorations and Utilities. â â For supplementary information about the notebook, refer to the Documentation Library CD. The Documentation Library CD included with all models includes the follo wing guides. Additional guidesâfor example, instruction manuals for using an optional Bluetooth de viceâare included with select models. For Info rmation About These T opics Select This Guide â Caring for the notebook and driv es â Preparing the notebook for transport â T rav eling with the notebook inter nationally Maintenance, Shipping and T rav el â Solving notebook problems y ourself â Getting help T roubleshooting â Gov ernmental and safety inf ormation â Protecting the notebook from static electricity Regulator y and Saf ety Notices Ergonomic and saf ety inf or mation Saf ety & Comf or t Guide General instructions f or using modem A T commands Modem Command Guidelines (Adv anced Users Only) A T commands suppor ted by an Agere modem. (An optional inter nal modem suppor ts the Agere command set.) Agere Command Set (Adv anced Users Only)* *A v ailable in English only . 345561-001.book Page 18 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â1 3 Key b o a r d Cont ents TouchPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 Identifying TouchPad Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 Using the TouchPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â3 Setting TouchPad Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â3 Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â4 Identifying Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â4 Hotkey Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â5 Hotkey Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â6 Hotkey Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â6 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â9 Turning the Keypad On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â10 Switching the Functions of Keypad Keys . . . . . . . . 3â10 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d To u c h Pa d Id entifying T ouchP ad Com ponents The T ouchPad includes the follo wing components: Identify ing T o uchP ad components 1 T ouchPad 4 T ouchPad on/off b utton 2 Left and right T ouchP ad b uttons 5 T ouchPad light 3 T ouchP ad scroll zones (2) 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â3 Using t he T o uc hP ad The T ouchPad pro vides the na vigation, selection, and scroll functions of an optional external mouse. â T o mov e the pointer , slide your f inger across the T ouchPad surface in the direction you wa nt to mov e the pointer . â If the pointer continues to mov e after you lift your f inger from the T ouchPad surf ace, wait a fe w seconds and the pointer will stop moving. â T o ex ecute the click functions of the left or right b utton on an external mouse, press the left or right T ouchPad b utton. â T o scroll upward, press the icon in the upw ard scroll zone. T o scroll do wnward, press the icon in the do wnward scroll zone. â T o enable or disable the T ouchPad, press the T ouchP ad b utton. When the T ouchPad is enabled, the T ouchPad light is on. The notebook turns on with the T ouchPad enabled. Users who work with ke ystrokes rather than mouse actions may prefer to disable the T ouchPad to pre v ent accidental T ouchPad acti vity . Set ting T ouchP ad Prefer ences Pointer speed and shape, click speed, mouse trails, and other pointing de vice preferences are set in the operating system Mouse Properties windo w . T o access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardw are icon > Mouse icon. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d Hot k e y s Id entifying H otk e y s Hotke ys are preset combinations of the Fn key 1 and one of the function ke ys 2 . The icons on the function ke ys F1 and F3 through F12 represent the hotke y functions av ailable on the notebook. Identif y in g hotk ey s 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â5 Hot k e y Qu ic k R ef er enc e The follo wing table identifies the def ault hotkey functions. F or information about changing the function of the Fn F5 hotke ys, see the âSetting Po wer Control Preferencesâ section in Chapter 4. Default Function Hotkeys Open Help and Suppor t window . Fn F1 Open Microsoft Inter net Explorer . Fn F3 Switch displa y and image. Fn F4 Initiate Standb y . Fn F5 Initiate QuickLoc k. Fn F6 Decrease displa y br ightness. Fn F7 Increase displa y br ightness. Fn F8 Pla y , pause, or resume an audio CD or D VD . Fn F9 Stop an audio CD or D VD . Fn F10 Pla y the pre vious track or chapter on an audio CD o r DV D. Fn F11 Pla y the next tr ack on an audio CD or D VD . Fn F12 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d Hot k e y Pr oce dur e s T o use a hotke ys command on the notebook ke yboard, use either of the follo wing procedures: â Briefly press the Fn ke y , then briefly press the second ke y of the hotke ys command. â Press and hold do wn the Fn ke y , briefly press the second ke y of the hotke ys command, then release both ke ys at the same time. Hotk e y C ommands Open H elp and Sup port Window (Fn F1 ) The Fn F1 hotke ys open the Help and Support window . From the Help and Support windo w you can access general information about your notebook, links to software updates and online technical support specialists, and other support features. For more information about the Help and Support windo w , see the âUsing the Help and Support W indo wâ section in Chapter 9, âSoftware Updates, Restorations and Utilities. â Open In ternet Explorer (Fn F3 ) The Fn F3 hotke ys open Internet Explorer . After you ha v e set up your Internet or network services and your Internet Explorer home page, you can use the Fn F3 hotke ys for quick access to your home page and the Internet. S witch Im ag e (Fn F4 ) The Fn F4 hotke ys switch the image among display devices connected to the external monitor connector or the S-V ideo jack on the notebook. For e xample, if an external monitor is connected to the notebook, pressing the Fn F4 hotke ys switches the image among the notebook display , the external monitor display , and a simultaneous display on both the notebook and the monitor . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â7 Initia te Standb y (Fn F5 ) The Fn F5 hotke ys are set by default to initiate Standb y . Standby can be initiated only while the notebook is on. If the notebook is in Hibernation, you must restore from Hibernation before you can initiate Standby . T o restore from Hibernation or resume from Standby , briefly press the po wer button. F or more information about using Standby and Hibernation, refer to Chapter 4, âPo wer . â For information about changing the function of the Fn F5 hotk eys, refer in Chapter 4 to the âSetting Po wer Control Preferencesâ section. Initia te Q uic kLoc k (Fn F6) The Fn F6 hotke ys initiate the operating system QuickLock security feature. The QuickLock feature disables the ke yboard and displays the log on screen. QuickLock does not disable the T ouchPad. Before you can use the QuickLock feature, you must set a W indo ws system password. F or instructions, refer to your operating system documentation. After you ha ve set a W indo ws system passw ord: â T o initiate QuickLock, press Fn F6. â T o exit QuickLock, enter your W indows system passw ord. Dec rease Bri ghtness (Fn F7) The Fn F7 hotke ys decrease notebook screen brightness. Inc rease Bri ghtn ess (Fn F8) The Fn F8 hotke ys increase notebook screen brightness. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Ke y b o a r d P l a y , P aus e, or Resume an Audio CD or D VD (Fn F9) The Fn F9 hotke ys function only when an audio CD or D VD is inserted. If the audio CD or D VD is â Not playing, press the Fn F9 hotke ys to begin or resume the play . â Playing, press the Fn F9 hotke ys to pause the play . Stop an Audio CD or D VD (Fn F1 0) The Fn F10 hotke ys stop the play of an audio CD or D VD that is playing. P l a y Pre v ious T rack of an Audio CD or D VD (Fn F1 1 ) The Fn F11 hotke ys play the previously played track of an audio CD or D VD that is playing. P lay Ne x t T rack of an Au dio CD or D VD (Fn F1 2) The Fn F12 hotke ys play the next track of an audio CD or D V D that is playing. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Ke y b o a r d Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 3â9 Key p a d The ke ypad consists of 15 ke ys that can be used like the ke ys on an external k eypad. When the k eypad is turned on, each k eypad ke y performs the functions indicated by the icon in the upper right corner of the ke y . Identify ing the k e ypad k e y s 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
3â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Ke y b o a r d T urnin g th e K e ypad O n an d Of f When the ke ypad is of f, press Fn num lk 1 to turn the keypad on. When the ke ypad is on, press Fn num lk to turn the ke ypad of f. The num lock light 2 turns on when the ke ypad is on. Identify ing the Fn and num lk k e y s and the num loc k light S witching t h e Functions of K e ypad K e y s Y ou can temporarily switch the functions of a ke ypad key between its standard function and its ke ypad function. â T o use a ke y on the ke ypad as a ke ypad key while the k eypad is turned of f, press and hold Fn while pressing the ke y . â T o use a ke y on the ke ypad as a standard key while the ke ypad is turned on: â Press and hold Fn to type with the ke y in lo wercase. â Press and hold Fn shift to type with the ke y in uppercase. Releasing the Fn ke y returns a ke ypad key to its set function. F or example, a k eypad k ey returns to its ke ypad function if the ke ypad is turned on or to its standard function if the ke ypad is turned of f. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â1 4 Po w e r Cont ents Understanding Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown . . . . 4â2 Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â3 Choosing Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown . . . . . . . . . 4â4 Using Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 Identifying Power Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4â5 Turning the Notebook or Display On or Off . . . . . . . 4â6 Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . . 4â6 Initiating or Resuming from Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7 Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . 4â8 Setting Power Control Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â9 Using Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â10 Identifying the Battery and Power/Standby Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â10 Switching Between Battery and External Power . . . 4â11 Charging a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â11 Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . 4â12 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â13 Calibrating a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â14 Storing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â16 Battery Conservation Settings and Procedures . . . . 4â17 Replacing a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â18 Recycling or Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . . . . . . 4â19 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r Un derstan ding Stan db y , Hibern ation and Shu tdo wn This section describes Standby , Hibernation, and shutdo wn and explains when to implement them. Standb y , Hibernation, and shutdo wn procedures are provided later in the chapter . Standby and Hibernation are energ y-saving features that can be initiated by you or b y the system. Standb y Standby reduces po wer to system components that are not in use. When Standby is initiated, your w ork is sav ed in random access memory (RAM) and the screen is cleared. â Sa ving your work before initia ting Standby is not usually necessary , b ut is a recommended precaution. â When the notebook is in Standby , the po wer/standby light flashes. When you resume from Standby , your work returns to the screen where you left of f. Hib e rn ati on Hibernation sa ves system memory to the hard dri ve, tak es a snapshot of the notebook image, then shuts do wn the notebook. When you resume from Hibernation, your work returns to the screen exactly as you left it. The follo wing information may be useful as you manage Hibernation: â Sa ving your work before initiating Hibernation is not usually necessary , b ut is a recommended precaution. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â3 â T o determine whether the notebook is in Hibernation or turned of f, press the po wer button: â If the notebook is in Hibernation, your work returns to the screen. â If the notebook is of f, W indo ws loads. â Hibernation is enabled by def a ult, but can be disabled. T o pre vent loss of w ork during a critical low-battery condition, disable Hibernation only during a battery pack calibration. T o verify that Hibernation is enabled, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Po wer Options icon > Hibernate tab . If Hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected. Ã CAUT ION: If the config urati on of the not ebook sy stem is c hanged dur ing Hiber nation , it may not be po ssible to r esume fr om Hibe rnation . When the notebook is in Hiber nation: â Do not add or r emo v e a memory module. â Do not connec t or disconnect an e xter nal dev ice . â Do not inse r t or r emo ve a CD , D VD , P C Car d , SD Car d, or MMC . Shu tdo w n Shutdo wn procedures turn of f the notebook. Whether to leav e a battery pack in the notebook or in storage depends on ho w you work: â Lea ving the battery pack in the notebook enables the battery pack to char ge whenev er the notebook is connected to external po wer and also protects your w ork during a power outage. â A battery pack in the notebook dischar ges more quickly , ev en when the notebook is turned of f, than a battery pack that has been remov ed from the notebook and stored in a cool, dry location. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r C hoosin g Standb y , H ibern a tion or Shu tdo w n If you plan to r esume shortly: Initiate Standb y for shorter times and Hibernation for longer times or po wer conserv ation. The amount of time a battery pack can support Standby or Hibernation or hold a char ge varies b y notebook configuration and the condition of the battery pack. â Initiating Standby clears the screen, uses less po wer than lea ving the notebook on, and your work returns quickly to the screen when you resume from Standby . A fully charged ne w battery pack can typically support Standby for up to 48 hours. â Initiating Hibernation clears the screen and uses much less po wer than Standby . Returning to work sa ved in Hibernation takes longer than returning to w ork sav ed in Standby , but is faster than returning to your place manually after restarting the notebook. A fully char ged new battery pack can typically support Hibernation for se veral weeks. If you plan to r esume within 2 weeks: Shut do wn the notebook. If possible, connect the notebook to external po wer to k eep an inserted battery pack fully char ged. If the notebook will be disconnected fr om e xternal power for mor e than 2 weeks: T o extend the life of an inserted battery pack, shut do wn the notebook. Remov e the battery pack and store it in a cool, dry location. If an e xternal power supply is uncertain, for example, because of an electrical storm, sa ve your w ork, then initiate Hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â5 Using Stan db y , H iberna tion an d Shu tdo w n Procedures This section explains the def ault Standby , Hibernation, and shutdo wn procedures and includes information about turning the display on or of f. Id entifying P o w er C ontrols and Indica tors Standby , Hibernation, shutdo wn, and display procedures use the follo wing controls and indicators: Identify ing St andby , Hiber nation , shu tdo w n, and displa y contr ols and indicato rs 1 P o wer button 3 Fn F5 hotke ys (to initiate Standb y) 2 Displa y s witch 4 P o wer/standb y light 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r T urnin g th e Notebook or Dis p lay On or O ff Using Em ergen cy Shutdo wn Procedur es If the notebook does not respond to the W indo ws shutdo wn procedure (Start > T urn Of f Computer > T urn Off), try the follo wing emergenc y shutdo wn procedures in the sequence provided: â If the notebook is running W indo ws XP Professional: Press ctrl alt delete. Select the Shut Do wn button, then select Shut do wn from the drop do wn list. â Press and hold do wn the po wer button for at least 4 seconds. â Unplug the notebook from external po wer and remo ve the battery pack. For battery pack remo v al instructions see the âReplacing a Battery Packâ section, later in this chapter . T ask Pr ocedure Results T ur n on the notebook. Press the pow er button. â Pressing the power button turns on the notebook from Standby, Hibernation, or shutdown. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns on. â Operating system loads . Shut down the notebook.* Select Star t > T urn Off Computer > T ur n Off. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns off . â Operating system shuts down. â Notebook tur ns off . T ur n off the display when the notebook is closed. Close the notebook. When the notebook is closed, the displa y presses the displa y s witch, which then tur ns off the displa y . *If the system is unresponsiv e, and you ar e unab le to shut down the notebook with this procedure, see âUsing Emerge ncy Shutdo wn Proceduresâ ne xt in this section. 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â7 Initia ting or Resuming from Standb y T ask Pr ocedure Result User-initiated Standby With the notebook on, use either of the f ollowing procedures: â Press the Fn F5 hotke ys . â Select Star t > T ur n off Computer > Stand b y . â P o wer/standb y light flashes. â Screen clears. System-initiated Standby If the notebook is running on e xter nal pow er , the system does not initiate Standby . If the notebook is running on batter y pow er , the system initiates Standby after 10 minutes of notebook inactivity . â P o wer/standb y light flashes. â Screen clears. Resume from user-initiated or system-initiated Standby . â Briefly press the power b utton, or mov e (or click any b utton on) an optional e xter nal USB mouse. â If the displa y was closed while the notebook was in Standby , open the display . â P o wer/standb y light tur ns on. â Y our work retur ns to the screen. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Po w e r Initia ting or Restorin g from Hiberna tion T ask Procedure Result User-initiated Hiber nation With the notebook on, use either of the f ollowing procedures: â Briefly press the power b utton. â Select Star t > Shut Down > Hiber nate. (If the Hibernate option is not displa yed, press and hold shift. ) â If the notebook is in Standby, you must resume from Standby before you can initiate Hibernation. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns off . â Screen clears. System-initiated Hiber nation If the notebook is running on e xter nal pow er , the system does not initiate Hiber nation. If the notebook is running on batter y pow er , the system initiates Hiber nation: â After 30 minutes of notebook inactivity , or â When an inser ted batter y pack reaches a cr itical low-battery condition (1 percent of a full charge remaining). â P o wer/standb y light tur ns off . â Screen clears. Restore from user-initiated or system-initiated Hiber nation. Press the pow er button. â If the system initiated Hibernation because of a critical low-battery condition, connect external power or insert a charged battery pack before you press the power button. â P o wer/standb y light tur ns on. â Y our work returns to the screen. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â9 Set ting P o w er Control Pr efer ences By default, when the notebook is on: â Briefly pressing the po wer button initiates Hibernation. â Pressing the Fn F5 hotke ys, called the âsleep bu ttonâ in the operating system, initiates Standby . â The display switch turns of f the display . The display switch is acti v ated by closing the display . (At default and all custom settings, the display switch also turns on the notebook if the display is opened while the notebook is in Standby .) T o change the function of the po wer button, the Fn F5 hotke ys, or the display switch: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Adv anced tab . â T o change the po wer button function, select a function from the drop-do wn list for When I Press The Po wer Button On My Computer . â T o change the function of the Fn F5 hotke ys, select a function from the drop-do wn list for When I Press The Sleep Button On My Computer . â T o change the display switch function, select a function from the drop-do wn list for When I Close The Lid Of My Portable Computer . 2. Select the OK b utton. The Hibernate function is a vaila ble in the po wer b utton, sleep b utton, and display switch drop-down lists only if Hibernation is enabled. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Using B a t ter y P o w er Id entifying t h e Ba t ter y an d P o w er/Standb y Ligh ts Battery pack procedures refer to the: Identify ing the battery and pow er/s tandb y lights 1 P o wer/standb y light 2 Batter y light 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â11 S witchin g Bet w een B a t ter y and External Po w e r The notebook switches between external po wer and battery po wer according to the av ailability of e xternal po wer . T o conserve the charge in an inserted battery pack, the notebook runs on external po wer whene v er external po wer is a v ailable. External po wer can be supplied from an electrical outlet through an A C adapter or an optional DC cable. If the notebook contains a charged battery pack and is running on external po wer , the notebook switches to battery po wer only if the A C adapter or DC cable is disconnected from the notebook. The Po wer Meter icon in the system tray changes shape whene ver the po wer source changes between battery po wer and external po wer . Cha r g i ng a Batt e ry P ack The battery pack char ges whenev er the notebook is connected to external po wer through an A C adapter or an optional DC cable. The battery pack char ges whether the notebook is turned off or turned on, b ut charges most quickly when the notebook is turned of f. When the notebook is turned on, charging times are longer and v ary with system acti vity . The battery light displays char ge status: â On and orange: the battery pack is char ging. â On and green: the battery pack is fully charged. â Flashing: the battery pack is malfunctioning and may need to be replaced. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Monitoring t he C h arge in a B a t ter y P ac k Obtainin g Accura te Ch arge Information T o increase the accuracy of all battery char ge displays: â Allo w the battery pack to discharge to less than 10 percent of a full char ge through normal use before charging it. â Char ge the battery pack fully . Even a ne w battery pack can display char ge information inaccurately if it has not been fully char ged. â If a battery pack has not been used for one month or more, the battery pack may need to be calibrated. Disp lay in g Ch arge Infor ma tion T o display battery charge information on the screen, use the operating system Po wer Meter feature. T o access Po wer Meter displays, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Meter tab . Po wer Meter displays battery status in both percent and time: â The percent indicates the amount of char ge remaining in the battery pack. â The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery pack if the battery pac k continues to pr ovide power at the curr ent le vel. For e xample, the time remaining will decrease if you start playing a D VD and will increase if you stop playing a D VD. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â13 Manag ing L o w -Bat te r y Cond it ion s The information in this section describes default alerts and system responses. Id entif ying Lo w-Ba tter y C onditions When the battery pack is the only po wer source for the notebook and drops to 10 percent of a full char ge, the notebook has reached a low-battery condition. A text w arning message appears on the screen. If a lo w-battery condition is not resolved and the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack continues to drop, the notebook e ventually enters a critical low-battery condition. Then, if the notebook is on or in Standby: â If Hibernation is enabled, the system initiates Hibernation. Unsa ved work may be lost. â If Hibernation is disabled, the notebook remains briefly in Standby , then shuts do wn. The power/standb y light turns of f, and the notebook cannot sa ve system memory to the hard dri ve. Resol ving Lo w-Ba t ter y Con ditions à CAUT ION: If the n otebook has r eached a c r itical lo w-battery condition and has begun to initiat e Hibern ation , do not re stor e po we r until Hibernati on is complete . When H ibernation is com plete , the po w er/standb y light tur ns off . If e xternal power is available, connect the notebook to the external po wer source. If a char ged battery pac k is available, shut do wn the notebook or initiate Hibernation. Insert a char ged battery pack, then turn on the notebook. If no power sour ce is available, sa ve your work. Then initiate Hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r C alibra ting a B a t ter y P ac k When to Calib rate Even if a battery pack is hea vily used, it should not be necessary to calibrate it more than once a month. It is not necessary to calibrate a ne w battery pack before first use. Calibrate the battery pack under the follo wing conditions: â When battery char ge displays seem inaccurate. â When you observe a signif icant change in battery run time. â When the battery pack has not been used for one month or more. Ho w to C alibrate T o calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully dischar ge, then fully recharge the battery pack. C harging t he B a t tery P ac k Char ge the battery pack while the notebook is in use. T o charge the battery pack: 1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook. For instructions, see âReplacing a Battery Packâ later in this chapter . 2. Connect the notebook to external po wer . (The battery light is on and orange as the battery pack char ges.) 3. Lea ve the notebook connected to e xternal po wer until the battery pack is fully char ged. (The battery light turns green.) Disc harging t h e Ba t ter y P ack Before you begin the full dischar ge, disable Hibernation. T o disable Hibernation, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Po wer Options > Hibernate tab . Then clear the Enable Hibernation check box . 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â15 If you use the notebook occasionally during the dischar ge procedure and ha ve set ener gy-saving timeouts, e xpect the follo wing performance from your system during the discharge process: â The monitor will not turn of f automatically . â Hard dri ve speed will not decrease automatically while the notebook is idle. â System-initiated Standby will not occur . Ã CAUT ION: If yo u plan to leav e the notebook unattended dur ing disc harge , s av e yo ur wo rk bef or e starting the disc harge pr ocedur e . T o fully discharge the battery pack: 1. Select the po wer icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Schemes tab . 2. Record all settings in the Pl ugged In column and all settings in the Running On Batteries column, so you can reset them after calibration. 3. Use the drop-do wn lists to set each item in both columns to Ne ve r . 4. Select the OK b utton. 5. Disconnect the notebook from the external po wer source, b ut do not turn of f the notebook. 6. Run the notebook on battery po wer until the battery pack is fully dischar ged. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the battery light turns of f and the notebook shuts do wn. 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Rech arging t he B at ter y P ac k 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and k eep the notebook connected until the battery pack is fully rechar ged and the battery light turns green. Y ou can use the notebook while the battery pack is rechar ging, but the battery pack will char ge faster if the notebook is turned of f. 2. Select the Po wer icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Schemes tab . 3. Reenter the settings you recorded for the items in the Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column. 4. Select the OK b utton. Ã CAUT ION: After calibr ating the battery pack , reena ble Hiber nation: selec t Start > Contr ol P a nel > P erfor mance and Maintenance > P ow er Options > H ibernate ta b, the n select the Enable H ibernation c hec k box . Storing a B a t ter y P ack If the notebook will be unused and unplugged for more than 2 weeks, remov e and store the battery pack. Ã CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to a batter y pac k, do not e xpose it t o high tem peratur es f or e xtended per iods of time . High temperatures, which may be present in parked cars or some workplaces, accelerate the self-disch ar ge rate of a stored battery pack. T o prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a location that is cool and dry . T o maintain the accuracy of battery char ge displays, calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â17 Ba t ter y C onser v ation Set tin gs and Procedur es Using the follo wing battery conserv ation settings and procedures extends the run time of a battery pack. â T urn of f wireless and local area netw ork (LAN) connections and exit modem applications wh en you are not using them. â Disconnect from the notebook any e xternal de vices that use po wer from the notebook. Battery run time is not af fected by external de vices that are plugged into an e xternal po wer source. â Stop or remov e a PC Card you are not using. â Disable or remov e an SD (Secure Digital) Card or MMC (multimedia card) you are not using. â Lo wer screen brightness. Screen brightness can be lo wered by pressing the Fn F7 hotke ys. â Lo wer system volume. V olume can be lo wered with the decrease v olume button. â T urn of f a de vice connected to the S-V ideo connector . A de vice connected to the S-V ideo connector can be turned of f by using the Fn F4 hotke ys to switch the image from the S-V ideo device to the notebook display . â If you lea ve your wo rk, initiate Standby or Hibernation or shut do wn the notebook. â Select a short wait time, 5 minutes or less, for the monitor timeout. T o change monitor timeout settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Po wer Meter tab . Select a short w ait time from the T urn Of f Monitor drop-do wn list, then select OK. 345561-001.book Page 17 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â18 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r Rep l a c i n g a B a t te r y P a c k à CAUT ION: T o pr e v ent los s of w ork w hen r emo v ing a bat tery pack that is the only po w er sour ce , initiate H ibernation or tur n off the not ebook bef or e r emov ing the battery pack . T o replace the battery pack: 1. T urn the notebook underside up. â T o remov e a battery pack, slide the battery release latch 1 . (The battery pack tilts upward.) Then pull the battery pack out of the battery bay 2 . R emo ving a battery pac k 345561-001.book Page 18 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Po w e r Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 4â19 â T o insert a battery pack, in sert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook 1 , then tilt the battery pack do wnward until it snaps into place 2 . Inserting a battery pack 2. T o restore from Hibernation or to turn on the notebook, press the po wer button. Rec y c ling or Dis posin g of a Used Batte ry P ack For information about rec ycling or disposing of a used battery pack, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide, âBattery Noticeâ section. 345561-001.book Page 19 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
4â20 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Po w e r 345561-001.book Page 20 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â1 5 Dri v e s an d Dri v e Media Cont ents Understanding Drive and Drive Media Terms . . . . . . . . . 5â2 Caring for Drives and Drive Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 Adding a Drive to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4 Using the IDE Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4 Inserting or Removing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5 Inserting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5 Removing a Disc (With Power). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 Removing a Disc (Without Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 Displaying Media Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 Protecting Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 Observing the Copyright Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 Setting the Boot Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 Replacing the Internal Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Un derstandin g Driv e an d Driv e M edia T erms Har d drives are for the permanent storage of data f iles and of software such as system f iles, applications, and dri vers. A hard dri ve is sometimes called a har d disk drive . Diskette drives support disk ettes , which are used to store or transport data. The notebook can read or write to any disk ette. A diskette dri v e is sometimes called a floppy disk drive. Optical drives include CD and D VD dri v es. Optical driv es support CDs and D VDs, often called discs, which are used to store or transport data and to play music and movies. D VDs hav e higher capacities than CDs. The notebook can read or write to optical dri ves as described in the follo wing table. A drive designation is a letter of the alphabet that the notebook uses to identify the dri ve. T o display the driv e designation of all the dri ves in the system, select Start > My Computer . A diskette or disc that can be inserted or remo ved from a dri v e is referred to as a drive medium. Fo r ex a mp l e, the term drive media includes diskettes, CDs, and D VDs. Optical Drive Read Write CD-ROM driv e Y es No D VD-ROM driv e Y es No CD-R W drive Y es Y es D VD/CD-R W dr iv e Y es Y es 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â3 C aring for Dri v e s and Driv e Media à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to the notebook or a dr iv e and loss of work: â Do not r emo v e the inter nal hard dr i ve e x cept fo r repair or r eplacement . F or ins truc tions, s ee theâReplac ing the In ternal Har d Dr iv e â sec tion later in this c hapter . â Electr os tatic disc har ge can damage electr onic compone nts. T o pre ven t electr ost atic damage to the notebook or a dr i ve , f ollow these 2 pr ecau tions: (1) Disc harg e your self fr om s tatic elec tri c it y bef or e handling a dri v e by touc hing a gr ounded metal object and (2) A v oi d touching the connect ors on a dr iv e . F or mor e infor mation about pr e v enting electr os tatic damage , r ef er on the Doc umentati on Li b ra r y CD to the Regulatory and Saf ety Notices guide , âElectr os tatic Disc harge â s ection . â Ex cessi v e for ce can damage dr i ve connec tors . When y ou inse r t a dr iv e , use o nly enough f or ce to s eat the dri v e . â Handle a dri v e car efull y . Do not dr op it. â A vo id e xposing a har d dr iv e or a disk ette to de vi ces w ith magnetic f ields. Pr oduc ts w ith magnetic f ields inc lude vi deo and audio t ape er asure pr oduc ts, monitors , and speak ers . Sec urity dev i ces w ith magnetic f ie lds include airport w alk -through de v ices and sec ur ity w ands. T he airport sec urity dev i ces that chec k carry-on luggage , usuall y while it is placed on a con v ey or belt , us e x -ra y s instead of magnetism and w ill not damage a har d dr iv e or a disk ette . â Do not spr a y a dri v e with c leaners . â A vo id e xposing a dr i ve t o liquids or t emper atur e extr eme s. â If y ou mail a dr iv e , ship it in pack aging that pr otec ts it fr om shock , v ibrati on , extr eme t emper atur es, and hi gh humidity . La bel the pack age âFRA GILE . â à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to dri v e media: â Do not open the metal sh utter of a disk ette or touch the disk w ithin the disk ette case . â Do not e xpose a disk ette to a str ong magneti c fi eld, suc h as the sec ur it y fi eld used b y a w alk -t hr ough sec uri t y de vi ce or a handheld sec ur it y wand . â Clean a CD or D VD onl y with a dis c cleaning kit , a vailable f r om most electr onics r etailers. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Adding a Driv e to th e S y s tem The internal hard dri ve and optical dri v e are standard features of the notebook. The type of optical dri ve v aries by notebook model. An optional dri ve can be added to the system b y connecting it, as instructed in the dri ve documentation, to one of the USB (uni versal serial b us) connectors or to the 1394 connector . Hard dri ve capacity can also be added with a microdri v e PC Card. An SD Card or MMC (multimedia card) can provide additional data storage. Using t h e I DE Driv e Light The IDE (Integrated Dri v e Electronics) light turns on when the internal hard dri ve or optical dri v e is being accessed. Identify ing the IDE dri v e ligh t 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â5 Inser ting or Remo v ing a Dis c Inserting a Disc 1. T urn on the notebook. 2. Press the release b utton 1 on the driv e bezel to release the media tray , then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2 . 3. Position a CD or one-sided D VD o ver the tray , label side up. 4. Gently press the center of the disc onto the tray spindle 3 until the disc snaps into place. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. (If the media tray is not fully e xtended, tilt the disc to position it ov er the tray spindle, then press it do wnward into position.) 5. Close the media tray 4 . Inserting a disc int o the optical dr i ve 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Rem o vin g a D is c ( Wi t h P o w e r) 1. T urn on the notebook. 2. Press the release b utton 1 on the driv e bezel to release the media tray , then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2 . 3. Remov e the disc from the tray by gently pushing do wn on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3 . Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surf aces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remo ve it. 4. Close the media tray 4 . 5. Place the disc in a protecti ve case. R emo ving a dis c fr om the opti cal dri v e w hen po w er is av ailable 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â7 Rem o vin g a D is c ( Wi t h ou t P o wer) If the notebook is turned of f or if no po wer is av ailable, the release b utton on the optical driv e will not work. T o remove a disc from an optical dri ve without using the release b utton: 1. Insert the end of a small object like a paper clip into the release access 1 in the front bezel of the dri ve. 2. Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is released, then pull the tray outward until it is fully e xtended 2 . 3. Remov e the disc from the tray by gently pushing do wn on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3 . Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surf aces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remo ve it. 4. Close the media tray 4 . 5. Place the disc in a protecti ve case. R emo ving a dis c fr om the opti cal dri v e w hen po we r is not a v ailable 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media P lay ing a Disc Y ou can play a CD in a CD dri ve or a D VD dri v e. Y ou can play a D VD only in a D V D dri ve. The information in this section a pplies to most optical dri ves and most disc software. F or information about specific disc softw are, including W indo ws Media Player , W inD VD, and Easy CD Creator , see the âUsing Multimedia Softw areâ section in Chapter 6. Disp l a ying M edia C ontents When you insert a CD or D VD into the system, the notebook can play the medium, display its contents, take no action, or display a response prompt on the screen. Y ou can choose ho w the notebook responds to the insertion of a medium by using the operating system AutoPlay feature. The notebook responds to the follo wing procedures at most AutoPlay settings: â T o pre vent an audio CD from opening when AutoPlay is enabled on the dri ve containing it, press the shift ke y as you insert the CD. â T o display the contents of a dri ve medium when the contents are not displayed by AutoPlay: 1. Insert the medium into the dri ve. 2. Select Start > Run, then type: explorer x: (where x = the dri ve designation of the dri v e containing the medium) 3. Select the OK b utton. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â9 Protectin g P lay bac k à CAUT ION: Inserting or r emov ing an y dev i ce while r unning an y multimedia a pplicati on may pau se or stop the pla y . à CAUT ION: Initiating Standb y or Hiber nation w hile pla y ing a dri v e medium ma y stop the pla y or diminish the quality of the play . If Standby or Hibernation is accidentally initiated during playback: â If you see the warning message âPutting the computer into Hibernation or Standby may stop the playback. Do you w ant to continue?â select No. (Audio and video may resume or you may need to restart the dri ve medium.) â If Standby or Hibernation initiates and no w arning message is displayed, resume from Hibernation or Standby b y briefly pressing the po wer button, then restart the medium. Obs er ving t he C op yright W arning It is a criminal of fense, under applicable copyright la ws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, f ilms, broadcasts, and sound recordings. This notebook should not be used for such purposes. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Set tin g th e Boot O rder By default, the notebook starts up from the internal hard dri v e. Y ou can set the notebook to start up from any bootable CD or D VD in the optical dri v e. A bootable CD or D VD contains f iles needed by the notebook to start up and operate properly . On some models, you can also start up from a dri ve connected to the notebook by USB. Startup preferences are set in th e Setup utility . The Setup utility is not a W indo ws utility and does not support the T ouchP ad. For information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. Rep l a c i n g t h e I n te rn al H ard Dr iv e The hard dri ve in the hard dri v e bay is the internal hard driv e. Remov e the internal hard dri ve only for repair or replacement. Ã CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t an unre sponsiv e s y stem and los s of w ork , do not begin this pr ocedur e until y ou hav e: â Sa ved y our w or k, c losed all open a pplicati ons, and shu t dow n the notebook. â Disconnect ed the notebook fr om e xter nal pow er and r emo v ed the battery pack . 1. Sa ve your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut do wn the notebook and close the display . 3. Disconnect the notebook from external po wer . 4. Remov e the battery pack. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â11 5. T urn the notebook underside up. 6. Remov e the 2 hard dri ve retaining scre ws. R emo ving the har d dr i v e r etaining sc r e ws 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media 7. T o remov e a hard dri ve, grasp the hard dri v e assembly (the hard dri ve, the hard dri v e cov er , and the hard dri ve brack et) using the hard dri ve recess 1 . T ilt the hard dri v e assembly upward 2 , then pull the assembly from the hard dri v e bay 3 . R emo ving an in ternal har d dr i ve f r om the har d dri v e ba y 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 5â13 8. T o insert a hard dri ve, insert the 2 alignment tabs on the hard dri ve co ver into the 2 alignment slots on the hard dri v e bay 1 , then tilt the hard dri ve assembly do wnward into the hard dri v e bay until it is seated 2 . Inserting an inter nal har d dri v e into the har d dr i ve ba y 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
5â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Dr iv es and Dr i ve Media 9. If you ha ve inserted a hard dri ve, reinsert the 2 hard dri v e retaining scre ws. (If you remov ed but did not replace a hard dri ve, put the retaining scre ws in a safe place.) R eplac ing the hard dr i v e r etaining sc r e w 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â1 6 Multim edi a Cont ents Adjusting Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â2 Using the Internal Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â3 Connecting an Audio Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â4 Connecting an S-Video Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 Connecting the Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 Connecting the Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â5 Turning a Video Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â6 Changing the Color Television Format . . . . . . . . . . . 6â6 Using Multimedia Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â7 Using Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â7 Using WinDVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â7 Using Easy CD Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6â9 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia Adjustin g V olume V olume can be adjusted by using the audio b uttons on the notebook or by using operating system or application v olume control software. The mute b utton ov errides all software v olume settings. T o adjust volume using the audio b uttons: â T o increase volume, press the increase v olume b utton 1 . â T o decrease v olume, press the decrease volume b utton 2 . â T o mute or restore v olume, press the mute button 3 . When v olume is muted, the mute light 4 turns on. When v olume is restored, the mute light turns of f. Identify ing the audi o buttons and mute li ght 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â3 Using t h e Internal Speak e rs The internal speakers play sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games, dri ve media, the Internet, and other sources. If an external de vice, such as a headset, is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled. Identify ing the inter nal speak er s 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia Con necting an A udi o De v ice à W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of pers onal injury , adjus t the volume bef or e putting on headphones or a headset . à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t possible damage to an exte rnal de vi ce , do not plug a monaur al (single sound c hannel) plug into the audi o -out jac k. The notebook has 2 audio jacks: â The microphone jack 1 connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. If a monaural microphone is connected, the same information is recorded on both channels. â The audio-out jack 2 , sometimes called a line-out jack, connects headphones or po wered external stereo speak ers. The audio-out jack is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. When you connect a de vice to the audio-out jack: â Use only a 3.5-mm plug. â The internal speakers are disabled. Identify ing the audi o jac ks 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â5 Con necting an S - Vi deo De vic e Con necti ng the Audi o The S-V ideo jack supports video signals only . If you are setting up a conf igura tion that combines audio and video functions, such as playing a D VD mo vie on your notebook and displaying it on your tele vision, you will need a standard 3.5-mm audio cable a vailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the notebook audio-out jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the audio input jack on the external de vice. Con necting the V ideo T o transmit video signals through the S-V ideo jack, you will need a standard S-V ideo cable av ailable from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug either end of the S-V ideo cable into the notebook S-V ideo jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the S-V ideo input jack on the external de vice. Identify ing the S - Vi deo jac k 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia T urning a Video D e v ice O n and O ff T o turn on a video de vice that is connected to the notebook, start or restart the notebook. Or , repeatedly press the Fn F4 hotke ys to switch the image. Pressing the Fn F4 hotke ys switches the image among the notebook display , any connected displays, and simultaneous display on the notebook and all connected displays. â Switching the image to a connected video de vice turns on the video de vice. â Switching the image to the notebook display only turns of f the video de vice. Cha ng i ng the C olo r T e le v is i o n F or m at Color tele vision formats are modes by which tele vision video signals are sent and recei ved. T o send signals between the notebook and a tele vision, both the notebook and the television must be using the same color tele vision format. The NTSC format is common in the United States, Canada, Japan, and South K orea. The P AL format is common in Europe, China, Russia, and Africa, and the P AL-M format is common in Brazil. Other South American and Central American countries may use NTSC, P AL, or P AL-M. Region-specif ic formats are set at the factory for most notebooks, b ut the region setting can be changed on an y notebook. Color tele vision format settings are changed in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is not a W indo ws utility and does not support the T ouchPad. F or information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â7 Using M ultimedi a Soft w are Using Windo w s Media Pla y er Use W indo ws Media Player primarily for playing audio CDs. Although video CDs can be played using W indo ws Media Player , InterV ideo W inD VD pro vides higher quality playback. T o open W indo ws Media Player , insert a CD into the optical dri ve, then close the tray . W ait se veral seconds. If W indo ws Media Player does not open, select Start > All Programs > W indo ws Media Player . T o play or stop the CD, use the on-screen Play b utton or Stop b utton, or use the media hotkeys described in the âHotk eysâ section of Chapter 3. Using WinD VD W inD VD is an application that enables you to play D VD movies or video CDs. If W inD VD is included with your notebook, the application is preinstalled. P l a ying a D VD or Video CD For best playback quality , sa ve and close all f iles and software unrelated to playing the D VD or video CD. If a D VD displays a Playback Of Content From This Re gion Is Not Permitted error message, stop the D VD, change the re gion setting, then restart the D VD. F or information about changing the region setting, see âManaging D VD Region Settingsâ ne xt in this chapter . 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Multimedia T o play a D VD or video CD: 1. Insert the D VD or video CD into the optical dri v e. 2. Assign W inD VD to play the video: â If the Microsoft W indo ws XP AppPicker windo w is displayed, select Play V ideo By Using W inD VD. â If the Microsoft W indo ws XP AppPicker windo w is not displayed, select Start > All Programs > InterV ideo W inD VD > InterV ideo W inD VD. 3. Follo w the instructions on the screen. Man agin g D VD Region Settin gs Most D VDs that contain copyrighted f iles also contain re gion codes. The region codes help protect cop yrights internationally . Y ou can play a D VD containing a re gion code only if the region code on the D VD matches the re gion setting on your D VD dri v e. If the region code on a D VD does not match the region setting on your dri v e, a Playback Of Content From This Region Is Not Permitted message is displayed when you insert the D VD. T o play the D VD, you must change the re gion setting on your DV D d r i v e . Ã CAUT ION: The r egio n setting on your D VD dr i ve can be c hanged only 5t i m e s . â The r egi on setting y ou selec t the fifth time becomes the per manent r egion s etting on the dri v e . â The n umber of allo wa ble regi on change s remaining o n the dri v e is displa yed in the R emaining T imes Until P ermane nt fi eld in the W inDVD w indo w . The number in the f ield inc ludes the fifth and permane nt change . T o change the region setting on dri v e media: 1. Insert the D VD into the optical dri v e. 2. If W inD VD does not open after a short pause, select Start > All Programs > InterV ideo W inD VD > InterV ideo W inD VD. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â9 3. Select the Properties icon in the lo wer right corner of the windo w . 4. Select the General tab . 5. Select the b utton for the region. 6. Select the OK b utton. Using E asy CD Creator Easy CD Creator is a data transfer utility that enables you to create or duplicate optical dri ve media. The utility is installed on select models and can be used with any CD or D VD supported by any optical dri v e in the system. When Easy CD Creator is insta lled, a âBurn CD & D VDs with Roxioâ icon is displayed at Start > All Programs > Start Menu. Und erstandin g Ea sy CD Creator F ea tures Easy CD Creator includes 2 applications: DirectCD and Easy CD Creator . The Easy CD Creator application includes CD Copier . â Use DirectCD with W indo ws Explorer to drag-and-drop data f iles between your hard dri ve and a CD or D VD or between your hard dri ve and a netw ork dr i ve. DirectCD is often used to back up data f iles or to share them with other people. Although DirectCD can be used with most application data f iles, including Microsoft Off ice data f iles, it cannot be used with audio f iles such as MP3 files. â Use Easy CD Creator , which includes CD Copier , to copy either data f iles such as Microsoft Off ice f iles, or audio f iles such as MP3 f iles, to a CD or D VD. â Use Easy CD Creator to copy indi vidual audio f iles to a CD or D VD, for e xample, to create a CD containing only your fa v orites. â Use CD Copier to duplicate a CD or D VD. 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Multimedia Preparing to Use E asy CD Creator à CAUT ION: T o pr e ve nt loss o f wo rk and damage to a CD or D VD: â Bef or e wr iting to a CD or D VD , connect the no tebook to a r eliable e xternal po w er sour ce . Do not w rit e to a CD or D VD while the notebook is running on battery po wer . â Bef or e wr iting to a CD or D VD , clo se all open applicati ons (inc luding scr een sa ve rs and anti vir us softw are) e x cept E as y CD Cr eator Basic . â Do not cop y dir ectly f rom a CD or D VD to another CD or D VD or fr om a netw ork dr i ve to a CD or D VD . Inst ead, cop y fr om a CD , D VD , or a networ k dri v e to y our hard dr i ve , then cop y fr om y our har d dri v e to the CD or D VD . â D o no t t y pe o n t h e n ot e b o o k keybo a rd o r m ove t h e n o t e bo o k wh i l e the notebook is w riting t o a CD or DVD . T he wr ite pr ocess is sensiti v e to v ibr ation . C hoosing Recording M edia HP recommends using high-quality media that correspond to the maximum speed of the optical dri ve. The notebook can write or copy to CDs and D VDs which provide one-time, non-erasable recording or to CDs and D VDs which pro vide erasable recording. Responding to th e UDF Prompt The f irst time you insert a CD or D VD into an optical dri ve, you may be prompted to install Uni versal Disk F ormat (UDF) Reader . When UDF Reader is installed, a CD or D VD created with DirectCD on your notebook can be used in another computer on which DirectCD is not installed. â Even if UDF Reader is installed on your notebook, a CD or D VD created with DirectCD software can be used in a compatible optical dri ve only if you select th e Rearrange the Files option as you create the CD or D VD. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Multimedia Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 6â11 F ormat tin g Recor ding Medi a Y ou can purchase optical dri ve media that either are or are not formatted for DirectCD. â T o use DirectCD, use a CD or D VD formatted for DirectCD. â T o use Easy CD Creator or CD Copier , do not use a CD or D VD formatted for DirectCD. T o erase DirectCD formatting from a CD or D VD so the CD or D VD can be used with Easy CD Creator or CD Copier: 1. Insert the CD or D VD into the optical dri v e. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Easy CD Creator Basic > CD-R W Eraser . 3. Select the Erase b utton. 4. Select the OK b utton. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
6â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Multimedia Selec ting E asy CD Creator Set ting s T o use DirectCD, Easy CD Creator , or CD Copier , the default settings sho wn in the follo wing table must be selected. These settings are compatible; for example, the settings for DirectCD do not conflict with the settings for CD Copier . â Auto Insert Notif ication settings are selected through the operating system. â T o select Disk-at-once settings: 1. Select Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD Creator 5 > Applications > CD Copier . 2. Select the Adv anced tab . 3. Clear the Disk-at-Once check box. 4. Select the Set as Default b utton. â T o select T rack-at-once settings: 1. Select Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD Creator 5. 2. The fourth item on the status bar at the lo wer edge of the CD Project windo w indicates whether T rack-at-Once or Disk-at-Once is selected. â If T rack-at-Once is displayed on the status bar , T rack-at-Once is already enabled. â If Disk-at-Once is selected, double-click Disk-at-Once to enable T rack-at-Once. Application Required Settings DirectCD Enab le Auto Inser t Notification Easy CD Creator Disab le Disk-at-Once and Enab le T rac k-at-Once CD Copier Disab le Disk-at-Once 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â1 7 Com mu nic ati on s Cont ents Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â2 Connecting the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â3 Using the Modem While Traveling Internationally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â6 Accessing Communication Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â9 Finding AT Command Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â9 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â10 Connecting the Network Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â11 Turning a Network Connection Off and On . . . . . . 7â12 Accessing the Network at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â12 Infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â13 Setting Up an Infrared Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 7â14 Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared . . . . . . . . . 7â14 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions Modem All notebook models include an RJ-11 telephone jack, and some models ship with a preinstalled modem. A modem cable with RJ-11 connectors at each end is included with select models. Y ou need a modem cable to connect a modem. If your model did not include a modem cable, a modem cable can be purchased from most computer or electronics retailers. If you purchased a notebook with an internal modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are not standard, a country-specif ic modem adapter is included with the notebook. An internal modem supports: â All applications supported by the operating system. â V .34 ITU (International T elecommunications Union) analog modem recommendations for speeds up to 33.6 Kbps. â V .44 data compression algorithm. â V .90/V .92 ITU digital/analog modem pair recommendations for speeds up to 56 Kbps. The digital/analog modem pair rates allo w faster do wnloads only from compliant digital sources. Maximum achie v able do wnload rates are currently unkno wn, may not reach 56 Kbps, and will v ary with line conditions. Maximum achie v able upload rates are limited to 48 Kbps, may not reach 48 Kbps, and will v ary with line conditions. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â3 Con necting the Mo dem Selec ting C onnec tors A modem must be connected to an analog telephone line. Ã W ARNIN G: T o re d u c e t h e ri s k of e l e c t ric s h o ck, f i re, or d a m a g e t o t h e equipment , do not plug a telephone cable in to the RJ- 4 5 networ k jack . Ã CAUT ION: Jacks f or digit al PBX sy ste ms may r ese mble RJ-11 telephone jac ks, but ar e not co m patible w ith the modem. Jacks for analog telephone lines and procedures for connecting the modem v ary by country: â If you are connecting a modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are standard, follo w the instructions in âConnecting a Modem to an RJ-11 Jackâ next in this section. â If you are connecting a modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are not standard, a modem adapter specif ic to the country in which you purcha sed the notebook is included with the notebook. Follo w the instructions in âConnecting a Modem with an Adapterâ later in this section. â If you plan to use a modem outsi de the country in which you purchased the notebook, you can purchase adapters specif ic for the countries on your itinerary from most computer or electronics retailers. For information about using country-specif ic software configurations, see âUsing the Modem While T ra veling Internati onallyâ later in this section. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions Connec tin g a Modem to an RJ- 1 1 Jac k T o connect a modem to an analog telephone line that has an RJ-11 telephone jack: 1. Identify the RJ-11 1 jack on the notebook. 2. If your modem cable has noise suppression circuitry 2 , which pre vents interference with TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable to ward the notebook. 3. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 telephone jack (not the RJ-45 network jack) on the notebook 3 . 4. Plug the other end of the modem cable into an RJ-11 telephone jack (not into an RJ-45 network jack or a PBX jack) 4 . Co nnecting a modem to an RJ-11 te lephone w all jac k (T eleph one w all jac ks vary in appear ance by r egi on and country .) Ã W ARNIN G: To r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f e l e c t r i c s h o c k , d i s c o n n e c t t h e m o d e m fr om the teleph one networ k befo re acce ssing an inter nal compartment of the notebook. Internal com par tments inc lude the memory compartment and the battery and hard dr i ve ba ys . 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â5 Connec tin g a Modem wit h an Adapter T o connect a modem to an analog telephone line that does not ha ve an RJ-11 telephone jack: 1. Identify the RJ-11 jack 1 on the notebook. 2. If the modem cable has noise suppression circuitry 2 , which pre vents interference with TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable to ward the notebook. 3. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 telephone jack (not the RJ-45 network jack) on the notebook 3 . 4. Plug the modem cable into the country-specif ic modem adapter 4 . 5. Plug the country-specif ic modem adapter into the telephone jack 5 . Co nnecting a modem w ith a modem adapte r (T elepho ne wall j acks v ar y in appear ance by r egi on and country .) Ã W ARNIN G: To r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f e l e c t r i c s h o c k , d i s c o n n e c t t h e m o d e m fr om the teleph one networ k befo re acce ssing an inter nal compartment of the notebook. Internal com par tments inc lude the memory compartment and the battery and hard dr i ve ba ys . 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions Using t he Mod em While T ra v eling Intern at ionally An internal modem is conf igured to function in, and meet the operating standards of, the country in which you purchased the notebook. T o use an internal modem in other countries, you must add country-specif ic modem configurations. Disp lay in g th e Current Countr y C onfiguration T o display the current country conf iguration, select Start > Control Panel > Date, T ime, Language, and Regional Options category > Re gional and Language Options icon > Regional Options tab . The current country conf iguration of the modem is displayed in the Location panel. Adding a Coun tr y Confi guration à CAUT ION: T o pr e ve nt the loss o f yo ur cur r ent country conf igur ation , do not dele te or replace y our c urr en t countr y conf igur ation . Additi onal country config urati ons can be added w ithout deleting the c urr ent conf igur ation . à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t modem malfunc tion and v iolati on of telecomm unications r egulati ons and law s, u se the modem onl y w ith the country conf igur ation f or the country in whi ch y ou ar e using the mode m. T o add a country conf iguration: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â7 3. Select the Ne w button, then type a name for the ne w location in the Location Name f ield. 4. Select a country or region for the new location from the Country/Region list. If you select a country or regi on that is not supported b y the modem, the country conf iguration defaults to USA or UK. 5. Select the OK b utton > OK button. Solv in g T r av el Connec tion Problems If you experience connection problems while using a modem outside the country in which you purchased the notebook, the follo wing suggestions may be helpful. Before changing any settings, you may w ant to write do wn your current settings so you can quickly replace those settings when you return home. C hec k t he Line A modem requires an analog, not a digital, telephone line. A line described as a PBX line is usually a digital line. A telephone line described as a data line, fax machine line, modem line, or standard telephone line is probably an analog line. C hec k t he Di aling Mode Dial a fe w digits on the telephone, then listen for clicks or tones. Clicks indicate that the telephone line supports pulse dialing. T ones indicate that the telephone line supports tone dialing. T o set an internal modem to support a dialing mode: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab . 3. Select your location, then select the Edit b utton. 4. Select the T one or Pulse radio b utton. 5. Select the OK b utton > OK button. 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Com mun ica t ions C hec k t he T elephone Nu mber Dial the telephone number on the telephone, verify that the remote modem is answering, then hang up. C hec k t he Di al T on e If a modem recei ves a dial tone it does not recognize, the modem will not dial and will display a No Dial T one error message. â T o set the modem to ignore all dial tones before dialing: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Modems tab . 3. Select your modem > Properties b utton > Modem tab . 4. Clear the W ait For Dial T o ne Before Dialing check box. 5. Select the OK b utton > OK button. â If you continue to recei ve the No Dial T one error message after clearing the check box: 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Netw ork and Internet Connections category . 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the Network and Internet Connections windo w , select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab . 3. Select your location, then select the Edit b utton. 4. Select your location from the Country/Region list. If you select a country or region that is not supported by the modem, the country conf iguration defaults to USA or UK. 5. Select the OK b utton. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â9 6. In the Phone and Modem Options windo w , select the Modems tab . 7. Select your modem > Properties b utton > Modem tab . 8. Clear the W ait For Dial T o ne Before Dialing check box. 9. Select the OK b utton > OK button. Accessing C ommunica tion Soft w are T o access preinstalled modem software, including softw are for terminal emulation and data transfer , select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications, then select an application, wizard, or utility . Finding A T C omman d Infor m ation It is not necessary to use A T commands with most modem software. If you prefer to use A T commands, refer on the Documentation Library CD to: â Modem Commands Guidelines (Advanced Users Only) for information about accessing HyperT erminal, identifying the modem model in your notebook, and using A T commands. â Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) for the A T commands supported by an Agere modem. If your notebook shipped with an internal modem, that modem supports the Agere command set. For command updates and supplementary information about your Agere modem, visit: http://www .agere.com Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) is provided on the Documentation Library CD in English only . 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Com mun ica t ions Netw ork All notebook models ship with an RJ-45 network jack. A netw ork cable with RJ-45 connectors at eac h end is included with select models. The notebook can be connected to a network whether or not the internal modem is connected to a telephone line. If your notebook is connected to a network, you may w ant to confer with your network administrator before changing netw ork settings. The notebook supports network speeds up to 10 Mbps when connected to a 10BaseT network and 100 Mbps when connected to a 100BaseTX network. 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â11 Con necti ng the Ne tw or k Cable A network cable has an 8-pin RJ -45 network connector at each end and may contain noise suppressi on circuitry , which pre vents interference with TV and radio reception. T o connect the cable: 1. Identify the RJ-45 network jack 1 on the notebook. 2. Orient the end of a network cable with noise suppression circuitry 2 to ward the notebook. 3. Plug the network cable into the notebook RJ-45 network jack 3 . 4. Plug the other end of the cable into the network RJ-45 jack 4 . Co nnecting a networ k cable à W ARNIN G: T o reduce the r isk of electr ic shoc k, dis connect the netw ork ca ble befo re acce ssing an inter nal compartment of the notebook . Inter nal compartments include the memo r y compartment and the battery and hard dr iv e ba ys . 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Com mun ica t ions T urnin g a Net w ork C onnec tion O ff an d O n T o conserve po wer , turn off a netw ork connection you are not using. â T o turn of f a network connection, log of f the network, then disconnect the network cable. â T o turn on a network connectio n, connect the netw ork cable, then log on to the network. Accessin g t he N et w ork at Star tu p T o connect the notebook to a PXE (Preboot eXecution En vironment) serv er during startup, you must enable the internal NIC for startup, then respond to the Network Service Boot prompt each time you want to connect to the serv er . â T o enable the NIC for startup and set the notebook to display the Network Service Boot prompt each time the notebook is started or restarted, set your preferences in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is not a W indo ws utility and does not support the T ouchPad. F or more information about using the Setup utility , refer to the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9 of this guide. â T o respond to the Network Service Boot prompt, press F12 while the prompt F12 = Boot from LAN appears very briefly in the lo wer left corner of the screen before W indo ws loads. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Com mun ic at ion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 7â13 Infrar ed The notebook is IrD A-compliant and can communicate with another infrared-equipped de vice that is also IrD A-compliant. The IrD A connection speed standard is 4 me gabits per second (Mbps). The infrared port supports lo w-speed connections up to 115 kilobits per second (Kbps) as well as high-speed connections up to 4 Mbps. Infrared signals are sent through an in visible beam of infrared light and must ha ve an unobstructed line of sight. Infrared performance may v ary with the performance of infrared peripherals, the distance and angle between infrared de vices, and the applications being used. L inking to an infr ar ed de v ice 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
7â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Com mun ica t ions Set ting U p an Infrared T ransmission For information about using infrared softw are and enabling or disabling infrared ports, refer to the operating system Help f iles and to the documentation included with the external infrared de vice. T o set up 2 infrared de vices, such as the notebook and an optional printer , for optimal transmission: â Position the de vices so that their infrared ports face each other at a distance of no more than 3.3 feet (1 meter). â Position the ports so that they f ace each other directly . The maximum capture angle is 30 degrees, so the ports must be aligned no more than 15 degrees of f center v ertically or horizontally . â Shield the ports from direct sunlight, flashing incandescent light, and fluorescent light. â Be sure that signals from a remote control or other wireless de vice (such as a cell phone, a headset, or an audio de vice) do not aim at either port. â During the transmission, do not mov e either de vice and do not allo w objects or mov ement to disrupt the beam. A v oi ding Stan db y While Using Infrared Standby is not compatible with infrared transmission. If the notebook is in Standby , an infrared transmission cannot be initiated. If Standby initiates during an infrared transmission, the transmission stops. T o resume from Standby , briefly press the po wer b utton. The transmission resumes when the notebook resumes from Standby . 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â1 8 Ha r d w ar e Op t io n s an d Upg r ades Cont ents Connecting a Powered Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â2 Connecting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â2 Using a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â3 Selecting a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â3 Configuring a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â4 Inserting a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â4 Stopping and Removing a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â5 Using an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â6 Using the SD Card Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â6 Inserting an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â7 Removing an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â8 Disabling or Restarting an SD Card or MMC . . . . . . 8â8 Increasing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9 Displaying Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â9 Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . . . . . . . 8â10 Connecting an Optional Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8â15 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Conn ec ting a P o w ered De vice T o connect the notebook to an optional external de vice that has a po wer cord: 1. Be sure the de vice is turned of f. 2. Connect the de vice to the jack or connector on the notebook specif ied by the de vice manufacturer . 3. Plug the de vice po wer cord into a grounded electrical outlet. 4. T urn on the de vice. â If a properly connected external monitor or other display de vice does not display an image, try pressing the Fn F4 hotke ys to switch the image to the ne w de vice. T o disconnect a po wered external de vice from the notebook: 1. T urn of f the de vice. 2. Disconnect the de vice from the notebook. Con necting a USB De vic e USB (uni versal serial b us) is a hardware interf ace that can be used to connect external de vices such as a USB k eyboard, mouse, dri ve, printer , scanner , or hub to the notebook. A hub is a connecting de vice that can be either po wered or unpo wered. USB hubs can be connected to a USB connector on the notebook or to other USB de vices. Hubs support v arying numbers of USB de vices and are us ed to increase the number of USB de vices in the system. â Po wered hubs must be connected to external po wer . â Unpo wered hubs must be connected either to a USB connector on the notebook or to a port on a po wered hub . 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â3 The USB connectors on the notebook support USB 2.0- and 1.1-compliant de vices. By default, USB de vices function only while the operating system is loaded. T o use a USB ke yboard or hub connected to a USB connector on the notebook during startup (before W indo ws loads) or in a non-W indo ws application or utility , enable USB leg acy support in the Setup utility . For more information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. Identify ing the 3 USB co nnector s on the notebook 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Using a PC Card A PC Card is a credit cardâsized accessory designed to conform to the standard specif ications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). The notebook PC Card slot supports both 32-bit CardBus and 16-bit PC Cards. PC Cards can be used to add m odem, sound, storage, wireless communication, or digital camera functions to the notebook. Selec ting a PC Card A T ype I or T ype II PC Card can be used. Zoomed video cards are not supported. Confi gurin g a PC Card à CAUT ION: If yo u install all of the so ft w are or an y of the e nablers pr ov ided b y a P C Car d manufac turer , yo u may not be able to u se other P C Car ds. If y ou ar e instr ucted b y the doc umentation inc luded w ith y our P C Car d to install de v ice dr i ver s: â Install onl y the dev i ce dri v ers f or yo ur operating s y stem . â Do not instal l oth er soft ware , such as card ser v ices, so ck et ser vi c es, or enabler s, that ma y also be supplied b y the PC C ard manufac turer . 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â5 Inser ting a PC Card à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to the PC C ard connec tors: â Use minimal f or ce when ins erting a PC Car d into a P C Car d slot . â Do not mo v e or tr ansport the notebook w hile a PC C ar d is inserted . 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the slot until the card is seated. Inserting a P C Car d 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Stopp ing and Remo v ing a PC Card à CAUT ION: T o pr ev ent l oss of work or an unresponsive s ystem , sto p the P C Car d be for e r emo v ing it . â Stopping a PC Card, e ven if it is not in use, conserv es po wer . 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are supported by the PC Card. 2. T o stop a PC Card, select the Safely Remov e Hardware icon on the taskbar , then select the PC Card. (T o display the Safely Remov e Hardware icon, select in the taskbar the icon for Sho w Hidden Icons.) 3. T o release the PC Card, press the PC Card eject b utton 1 . (If the PC Card b utton does not extend while a PC Card is in the PC Card slot, press the b utton once to extend the b utton, then press the b utton again to release the PC Card.) 4. Gently pull out the PC Card 2 . Rem ovi n g a PC Ca rd 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â7 Using an SD C ard or MMC Ã CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t damage to the SD Car d connectors: â Use minimal f or ce when ins erting an SD Card or MM C into an SD Car d slot . â Do not mo ve or tr ansport the notebook w hile an SD Car d or MMC is inserted . SD (Secure Digital) Cards and MM Cs (multimedia cards) are flash memory cards that provide secure data storage and con venient data sharing. These cards are often used with SD-equipped cameras and PD As as well as notebooks. Th e SD Card features on the notebook support both SD Cards and MMCs. Using t he SD C ard Ligh t The SD Card light turns on when an inserted SD Card or MMC is being accessed. The SD Card light turns of f when an inserted SD Card or MMC is inacti ve or wh en the SD Card slot is empty . Identify ing the SD Car d li ght 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Inser ting an SD C ard or MMC T o insert an SD Card or MMC: 1. Hold the card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the SD Card slot until the card is seated. (The card will extend outw ard slightly beyond the notebook.) Inserting an SD Car d or MMC 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â9 Remo v in g an SD Card or MMC T o remov e an SD Card or MMC: 1. Close all applications and complete all acti vities that are supported by the card. (T o stop a data transfer , select the cancel b utton in the operating system Copying windo w .) 2. Push the card inward until it is released. 3. Pull the card out of the slot. R eleasing and r emo v ing an SD Car d or MMC Disa blin g or Re s tartin g an SD C ard or MMC An inserted SD Card or MMC uses po wer e ven when the card is not in use. Disabling the card conserves po wer . T o disable an inserted SD Card or MMC, double-click the My Computer icon on the W indo ws Desktop, right-click the dri ve assigned to the card, then select Ej ect. (The card is stopped but is not released from the SD Card slot.) T o restart the card, remov e, then reinsert, the card. For instructions, see âInserting an SD Card or MMCâ and âRemoving an SD Card or MMCâ in this chapter . 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Inc reasin g Memor y Y ou can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory) in the notebook with an optional HP-approv ed memory module. The notebook memory slot supports one 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module. Some notebook models ship with a v acant memory slot. On other models the memory slot contains a preinstalled memory module that can be replaced at any time. Disp l a ying M emor y Information When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the hard dri ve space reserv ed for the hibernation f ile. If you experience problems with Hibernation after increasing RAM, verify that your hard dri v e has enough free space for the larger hibernation f ile. â T o display the amount of RAM in the system: Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab . â T o display both the amount of free space on your hard dri ve and the amount of space required by the hibernation f ile: Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Po wer Options icon > Hibernate tab . 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â11 R emo v ing or Inserti ng a Memory Mod ule à W ARNIN G: T o pre v ent e xposur e to elec tri cal shock , access onl y the memory compar tment dur ing this pr ocedur e . The memory compartment and the battery and hard dr i ve ba y s are the onl y us er -accessible inte rnal compartments on the notebook . All other ar eas that r equir e a tool t o access sho uld be opened only b y an HP a uthor i z ed serv ice pr o v ider . à W ARNIN G: T o pre v ent e xposur e to elec tri cal shock and damage t o the notebook , shut do w n the notebook, un plug the pow er cor d , and r emo ve the battery pack bef or e installing a memory module . à CAUT ION: T o pr ev ent elec tr ostati c dischar ge fr om damaging e lectr onic components: bef or e beginning this pr ocedure , dis char ge yo urself o f stati c electr ic ity by touc hing a gr ounded metal obj ect . F or mor e info rmatio n about pr ev enting electr o static damage , r ef er on the Doc umentatio n Libr ary CD to the Re gulator y and Saf ety Notices guide , âElectr os tatic Disc harge â c hapter . 1. Sa ve your work and shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is of f or in Hibernation, briefly press the po wer button. If your w ork returns to the screen, sa ve your work, e xit all applications, then shut do wn the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 4. Remov e the battery pack. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades 5. T urn the notebook underside up. 6. Remov e the memory compartment scre w 1 , then lift up and remo ve the memory compartment cov er 2 . Opening the memory compartment 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â13 7. Remov e or insert the memory module. T o remov e a memory module: a. Pull aw ay the retention clips on each side of the module 1 . (The module tilts upward.) b . Grasp the edges of the module and gently pull the module out of the memory slot 2 . c. T o protect a memory module after remov al, place it in an electrostatic-safe container . R emo ving a me mor y module 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades T o insert a memory module: a. Align the ke yed (notched) edge of the module with the ke yed area in the memory slot 1 . b . W ith the module at a 45-de gree angle from the surface of the memory compartment, press the module into the memory slot until it is seated 2 . c. Push the module do wnward until the retention clips snap into place 3 . Inserting a memory module 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Har dw ar e Options and Upgr ades Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 8â15 8. Align the tabs on the memory compartment cov er with the cov er slots on the notebook, then tilt the cov er do wnward until it is seated 1 . 9. Reinsert and tighten the memory compartment scre w 2 . 10. Replace the battery pack (if you remov ed a battery pack at the beginning of this procedure), reconnect the notebook to external po wer , then restart the notebook. Clo sing the memory compartment 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
8â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 Hard w are Options and Upgr ades Conn ec ting an O ption al Ca bl e Loc k â The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not pre vent the product from being mishandled or stolen. An optional cable lock is a security de vice that pre vents unauthorized remov al of the notebook. Loop the cable around a secure object, then insert the cable lock 1 into the security cable slot 2 and lock it with the cable lock ke y 3 . Co nnecting an optional ca ble lock 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â1 9 Sof t w are U pd a tes , Re s torations an d U tilities Cont ents Updating Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â2 Preparing for a Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â2 Downloading and Installing an Up date . . . . . . . . . . . 9â4 Backing Up and Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â7 Setting a System Restore Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â7 Restoring to a System Restore Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â7 Repairing or Reinstalling the Operating System . . . . . . . 9â8 Repairing the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â8 Reinstalling the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â9 Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â10 Installing a Retail Version of an Operating System . . . . 9â11 Using the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â11 Opening the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â11 Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility . . . . . 9â12 Restoring Setup Utility Default Settings . . . . . . . . . 9â12 Exiting the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â12 Using the Support Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â13 Using the Help and Support Window . . . . . . . . . . . 9â13 Using Support Telephone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 9â14 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Updat ing So ft w a r e For optimal notebook performance and to mak e sure your notebook remains compatible with changing technologies, install the latest versions of the softw are provided with your notebook as they become a v ailable. T o update notebook software: 1. Prepare for any update b y identifying your notebook type, series or family , and model. Prepare for a R OM (read-only memory) update b y identifying the R OM v ersion currently installed on the notebook. 2. Access the updates at the HP W eb site. 3. Do wnload and install the updates. â The notebook R OM stores the BIOS (basic input-output system). The BIOS determines ho w the notebook hardware interacts with the operating system and external de vices and also supports such notebook services as time and date. 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â3 Preparing for a Soft w are Upd ate If your notebook connects to a network, consult with your network administrator before installing an y software updates, particularly a R OM update. Accessing N otebook Product Information T o access the updates for your notebook, you will need the follo wing information: â The product cate gory is Notebook. â The product family name and series number are printed on the display bezel. â More complete model information is provided on the serial number label on the underside of the notebook. The product name, notebook mode l, and notebook serial number are also displayed in the same se ction of the Setup utility that displays R OM information, as described in the ne xt section. Accessin g Notebook ROM Info rm ation T o determine whether an a vailable R OM update is a later R OM v ersion than the R OM v ersion currently installed on the notebook, you need to kno w the version of the currently installed R OM. R OM information is displayed in the Setup utility . The Setup utility is a non-W indo ws utility that does not support the T ouchPad. F or complete information about using the Setup utility , see the âUsing the Setup Utilityâ section in Chapter 9. 1. T o open the Setup utility , turn on or restart the notebook. 2. Before W indo ws opens and while the F10 = R O M Based Setup prompt is displayed in the lo wer left section of the screen, press F10. 3. Use the arro w ke ys to select the File menu, then press enter . 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities 4. Use the do wn arro w key to select System Info, then press enter . (The R OM v ersion and date are displayed in the System BIOS V ersion f ield.) 5. T o close the System Info windo w and exit the Setup utility without changing any settings: a. Press esc to close the windo w . b . Use the arro w ke ys to select the File menu, then press enter . c. Use the arro w ke ys to select Ignore changes and exit, then press enter . Do w nloa din g and Ins talling an Upd a te Most software at the HP W eb site is packaged in a compressed f ile called a SoftP aq. Some R OM updates may be packaged in a compressed f ile called a RomP aq. Most do wnload packages contai n a file named Readme.txt. A Readme.txt f ile contains detailed descriptiv e, installation, and troubleshooting information about the do wnload. The Readme.txt f iles included with RomPaqs are English only . The follo wing sections provide instructions for do wnloading and installing: â A R OM update. â A SoftPaq containing an update other than a R OM update. 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â5 Do wnloadin g and Installin g a ROM Updat e à CAUT ION: T o pr e ven t ser ious damage to the notebook or an unsucce ssful installati on, do w nload and install a R OM updat e only w hile the notebook is connected to reli able e xternal po w er using the A C adapter or a DC cable . (Do not do w nload or install a R OM update w hile the notebook is dock ed or r unning on battery pow er .) During the do w nload and installati on: â Do not unplug the notebook fr om the electr ical outlet . â Do not sh ut dow n the notebook or initi ate Standb y or Hiber nation . â Do not inse r t , r emov e , connect , or disconnec t any de v ice , cable , or cord . Do wn loadi ng a R O M Updat e: 1. Access the page at the HP W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or , visit the HP W eb Site at: http://www .hp.com/support 2. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the R OM update you w ant to download. 3. At the do wnload area: a. Record the date, name, or other identif ier of any R OM update that is later than the R OM currently installed on your notebook. (Y ou may need to identify the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . Record the path to the default or custom location on the hard dri ve to which the R OM package will download. (Y ou may need to access the R OM package after it has been do wnloaded.) c. Follo w the online instructions to do wnload your selection to the hard dri ve. 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â6 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Installing a ROM Upda te R OM installation procedures v ary . Follo w any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the do wnload is complete. If no instructions are displayed: 1. Open W indo ws Explorer . T o open W indo ws Explorer from the Start b utton, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > W indo ws Explorer . 2. In the left pane of the W indo ws Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation. (The hard dri v e designation is typically Local Disk C.) Then follo w the path you recorded earlier to the folder on your hard dri ve containing the update. 3. T o begin the installation, open the folder , then double-click the f ile with an .ex e extension, for e xample, Filename.ex e. (The R OM update installation be gins.) 4. T o complete the installation, follo w the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded file from the destination folder . 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â7 Do wnloadin g and Installin g a Non -ROM SoftP aq T o update software other than a R O M update: 1. Access the page at the HP W eb site that provides softw are for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or , visit the HP W eb site at: http://www .hp.com/support 2. Follo w the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the SoftPaq you w ant to do wnload. 3. At the do wnload area: a. Write do wn the date, name, or other identifier of the SoftPaq you plan to do wnload. (Y ou will need to identify the update later , after it has been do wnloaded to the hard dri ve.) b . Follo w the online instructions to do wnload the SoftPaq to the hard dri ve. 4. When the do wnload is complete, open W indo ws Explorer . T o open W indo ws Explorer from the Start b utton, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > W indo ws Explorer . 5. In the left pane of the W indo ws Explorer windo w , select My Computer > your hard dri ve designation, which is typically Local Disk C > HP . 6. In the HP folder , select the name or number of the softw are package you ha ve do wnloaded. 7. Select the f ile that includes an .ex e extension, for e xample, Filename.ex e. (The installation begins.) 8. T o complete the installation, follo w the instructions on the screen. â After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the do wnloaded file from the HP folder . 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â8 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities B ac kin g Up an d Re s toring D ata The System Restore utility enables you to safeguard your system f iles and functional configurations b y using System Restore points. System Restore points are restorable, benchmark âsnapshotsâ of your system. The notebook may set System Restore points whene ver you change personal settings or add softw are or hardware. Setting System Restore points manually pro vides additional protection for your system f iles and settings. HP recommends that you set System Restore points: â Before you add or extensi v ely modify software or hardware. â Periodically , whenev er the system is performing optimally . Set ting a S y s tem Re s tore P oin t T o set a System Restore point manually: 1. Select Start > Help & Support > T ools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follo w the on-screen instructions for setting a Restore Point. Re s toring to a S y stem Restore P oin t T o restore the notebook to a System Restore point: 1. Select Start > Help & Support > T ools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follo w the on-screen instructions for restoring the notebook to a Restore Point. 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â9 Repairing or Reinstalling t h e Op erating S y stem The OS CD included with your note book can be used to repair or reinstall the operating system. Both operations may take one to 2 hours to complete. â Repairing the operating system preserves your data and settings. â Reinstalling the operating system deletes all f iles on the notebook. After the operating system has been reinstalled, all de vice dri vers must also be reinstalled. HP recommends that you try to restore your system by using the System Restore utility before you consider repairing or reinstalling your operating system. For restoration instructions, see âBacking Up and Restoring Dataâ earlier in this chapter . If a System Restore restoration fail s to restore functionality , first try to repair the operating system. If the repair procedure does not restore functionality , you may need to reinstall the operating system. R epa ir ing the Ope rat ing S y stem T o repair the operating system without deleting your personal data: 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD (included with the notebook) into the optical dri ve. 3. Press and hold the po wer button for 5 seconds to turn of f the notebook. 4. Briefly press the po wer button to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any k ey to boot from CD. (After a fe w minutes, the W elcome to Setup screen is displayed.) 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â10 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities 6. Press enter to continue. (A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed.) 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. (The Setup windo w is displayed.) 8. Press R to repair the selected W indo ws installation. (The repair process begins.) After the repair process is complete, which may take up to 2 hours, the notebook restarts in W indo ws. Reinstalling t he O pera ting S y stem If the System Recov ery and operating system repair procedures did not restore functionality to your notebook, it may be necessary to reinstall the operating system. Ã CAUT ION: P e rsonal data and an y so ft w are y ou ha ve ins talled on the notebook w ill be lost dur ing the oper ating s ys tem r einst allation pr ocedur e desc ribed in this s ection . T o pr otect y our data , back u p yo ur M y Documents f older bef or e beginning the pr ocedur e. F or back up info rmati on and instruc tions , select S tart > Help and Support. A lso see âBacking Up and R est oring Data â earli er in this secti on . â During the reinstallation, you may be prompted for your product ke y . The product ke y is displayed on the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label af fix ed to the underside of the notebook. T o reinstall the operating system using the OS CD included with the notebook: 1. Connect the notebook to external po wer and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD into the optical dri ve. 3. Press and hold the po wer button for 5 seconds to turn of f the notebook. 4. Briefly press the po wer button to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any k ey to boot from CD. (After a fe w minutes, the W elcome to Setup screen is displayed.) 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â11 6. Press enter to continue. (A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed.) 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. (The Setup windo w is displayed.) 8. Press esc to continue installing a fresh copy of the operating system. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS f ile system (Quick), then press enter . (A caution is displayed. The caution explains that formatting this dri v e will delete all current f iles.) 12. Press F to format the dri ve. (The reinstallation process be gins.) After the repair process is complete, which may take up to 2 hours, the notebook restarts in W indo ws, and you can be gin to reinstall de vice dri vers. Reinstalling De vice Dri v ers and Ot h er Soft war e After the installation process is complete, you must reinstall dri vers. T o reinstall dri vers using the Dri v er Recov ery CD included with the notebook: 1. While running W indo ws, insert the Dri ver Reco v ery CD into the optical dri ve. If the CD does not open within se veral seconds, select Start > Run. Then type D:\SWSETUP\APPINSTL\SETUP .EXE (where D indicates the optical dri ve). 2. Follo w the on-screen instructions for installing dri v ers. After the dri vers are reinstalled, you must reinstall an y software you added to the notebook. Reinstallation instructions are usually provided on the softw are CD, in the CD package, or at the manufacturerâ s W eb site. 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â12 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Installin g a Retail V ersion of an Op erating S y stem The W indo ws operating system pro vided on the notebook or on a restoration CD is enhanced by HP . The HP enhancements add po wer and security features and provide supplementary support for external de vices such as dri v es and PC Cards. Ã CAUT ION: Replac ing an oper ating s y stem enhanced b y HP w ith a r etail v ersi on of an oper ating s ys tem w ill r esult in the loss o f all HP enhancements . In some case s, the loss o f these enhancements ma y r esult in an unr esponsi ve s y stem or the lo ss of complete U SB support. Using t h e Setup U tilit y The Setup utility is a preinstalled, R OM-based information and customization utility that can be used e ven when your operating system is not working or will not load. The utility reports information about the notebook and provides settings for startup, password, port, Setup utility appearance, and other preferences. Openin g t he Setu p Utilit y T o access most settings: 1. Start up or restart the notebook. 2. Before W indo ws opens and while the F10 = R O M Based Setup prompt is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen, press F10. On some models, you must start up (not restart) the notebook to access the settings for a hard dri ve passw ord. 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â13 Naviga ting an d Sel ec ting in t he S etup U tilit y Because the Setup utility is not W indo ws-based, it does not support the T ouchPad. Na vigation and selection are b y keystrok e. â T o na vigate, use the up and down arro w k eys or tab. â T o select an item, use the arro w keys to select the item, then press enter . â T o close a display b ut remain in the Setup utility , press esc. An on-screen guide to na vigation and selection is displayed at the lo wer edge of most Setup utility submenu screens. T o minimize ke ystrokes b y using the <Alt> K ey Acti v ates Accelerators feature: 1. Press and hold alt. (A letter or number in most on-screen items is highlighted.) 2. Press the ke yboard ke y corresponding to the highlighted letter or number in the item you want to select. For e xample, to select an on-screen OK b utton, press alt. When the âOâ in OK is highlighted, press O. Re s toring S etup Utilit y D efault Set tin gs T o return all Setup utility settings to default v alues, select File menu > Restore Defaults. (Identif ication information, including R OM v ersion information, is retained.) Exiting t he Setup U tilit y The Setup Utility exit options are on the File menu. When you select either option, W indo ws opens after the Setup utility closes. â T o close the utility and sa ve your changes from the current session, select Sa ve changes and e xit. â T o close the utility without sa ving changes from the current session, select Ignore changes and exit. 345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â14 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities Using t h e Sup port U tilities If you cannot solve a notebook problem b y using this guide or the supplementary information, including the T r oubleshooting guide, on the Documentation Library CD, you may need to contact HP . Using t he H elp and Su ppor t Windo w Select Start > Help and Support or press the Fn F1 hotke ys. The Help and Support windo w provides access to information about using your operating system and to support areas of the HP W eb site. Most of the support areas are a vailable in se v eral languages, but some links may be una vailable in some re gions. Y ou can use the links in the Help and Support windo w to: â Initiate an online service e vent with a support specialist. â Do wnload the latest dri vers, utilities, and software updates for your notebook. â Obtain information about your notebook such as specif ications, white papers, customer advisories, and all documentation included with your notebook. 345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Softwar e Updates , Re stor ations and Utilitie s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 9â15 Using Su ppor t T el ephon e Numbers Obtainin g Suppor t T elephone N umbers T o obtain a list of worldwide customer support telephone numbers, use either of the follo wing methods: â Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon. Then, near the lo wer edge of the System Properties windo w , select the Support Information b utton. â Refer to the W orldwide T elephone Numbers booklet (English only) included with your notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center . Preparing to Call T echnical Su pport T o provide the f astest possible resolution of your problem, hav e the notebook and the follo wing information av ailable when you call: â Serial number and model description, which are provided on labels af fix ed to the notebook. â Purchase date on the in v oice. â Conditions under which the problem occurred. â Error messages that ha ve been displayed. â Operating system version number and re gistration number . â T o display the operating system version number and registration number , select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab . â Brand and model of an optional printer . 345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
9â16 Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP ar t 2 So f twar e Updat es, R estor ati ons and Utilities 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 Aâ1 A Spec ifica tions The information in this appendix may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the notebook internationally or in extreme en vironments. Note boo k Dimen sion s Op erating Env ironment Dimension U .S. Metric Height 1.24 inches 3.15 cm Width 14.06 inches 35.7 cm Depth 10 inches 25.4 cm Factor U.S. Metric T emperature Operating 50° to 95° F 10° to 35° C Nonoperating -4° to 140° F -20° to 60° C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating 10% to 90% 10% to 90% Nonoperating 5% to 95% 5% to 95% Maxim um altitude (unpressurize d) Operating 10,000 ft 3,048 m Nonoperating 30,000 ft 9,144 m 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Aâ2 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Spe cifica tion s Rated Inp ut P o w er The notebook operates on DC po wer , which can be supplied b y an A C or a DC po wer source. Although the notebook can be po wered from a stand-alone DC po wer source, HP strongly recommends that the notebook be po wered only with an A C adapter or DC cable supplied or appro ved b y HP . An A C adapter pro vided by HP for use with this notebook is capable of accepting A C po wer within the follo wing specif ications: The notebook is capable of accepting DC po wer within the follo wing specifications: This product is designed for IT po wer systems in Norway with phase-to-phase v oltage not exceeding 240 Vrms. Input P o wer Rating Operating v oltage 100â240V A C @ 1.7A - 50â60Hz Operating current 1.5A r ms Operating frequency range 50 to 60Hz Input P o wer Rating Operating v oltage 18.5V DC @ 3.5A - 65W Operating current 4.9A 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Spe cifica tion s Startup and R ef er ence GuideâP art 2 Aâ3 Finding More En v ironmental Inf orma tion The specif ications in this appendix contain information about exposing the notebook to en vironmental extremes. â For similar information about storing battery packs, see the âStoring a Battery Packâ section in Chapter 4. â For information about e xposing the notebook to sunlight, ultra violet light, x-rays, or magnetic fields, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Maintenance , Shipping and T ravel guide. 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Aâ4 S tartup an d R efer ence GuideâP a rt 2 Spe cifica tion s 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 connector 2â9 A AC adapter 4â11 connecting 1â5, 4â11 disconnecting 4â11 identifying 2â17 power connector 2â12 AC power 1â16, 4â11 adapter AC 1â5, 2â17, 4â11 country-specific modem 2â17, 7â3 , 7â5 Japan-specific outlet 2â17 Agere 7â9 Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) 2â18 Agere modem AT commands 7â9 Aironet, Cisco WLAN products 1â13 airport security devices 5â3 altitude specifications Aâ1 antennas 2â4 , 2â12 antivirus software 1â15 applications key 2â4 applications. See software; software updates AT commands 2â18, 7â9 audio CD. See CD(s) audio-out jack connecting 6â4 identifying 2â8 AutoPlay 5â8 B backup, system 9â8 battery bay identifying 2â13 inserting battery pack 1â3 removing battery pack 4â18 battery light 2â6 battery pack calibrating 4â14 causing CD or DVD write corruption 6â10 charging 1â2, 1â6, 4â11 inserting 1â3 monitoring charge 4â12 removing 4â18 storing 4â16 when to remove 4â3 battery power conserving 4â17 low-battery conditions 4â13 running notebook on 4â11 345561-001.book Page 1 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ2 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x switching to and from 4â11 when to use 1â14, 4â4 BIOS (basic input output system) 9â2 Bluetooth device 1â11 boot order 5â10 button(s) PC Card eject 2â11, 8â6 power 2â5 TouchPad 2â3, 3â3 volume 2â7, 6â2 wireless device 1â11, 2â6, 2â8 See also key; latch; switch, display C cable AC adapter 1â5 audio 6â5 DC 2â12 modem 2â9, 2â16, 7â2 network 2â16, 7â11 S-Video 6â5 See also cord, power cable lock, connecting 8â16 calibration, battery 4â14 caps lock light 2â6 card and socket services, PC Card 8â4 card. See memory, modules supported; PC Card; SD Card CD drive. See drives CD(s) CD-R vs. CD-RW 6â10 copying 6â9 creating 6â9 playing, with Windows Media Player 6â7 playing, with WinDVD 6â7 starting from 5â10 See also drive media Certificate of Authenticity label 2â15 , 9â10 certification, WiFi 1â13 Cisco Aironet WLAN products 1â13 Cisco Compatible Extension program 1â13 commands, AT 2â18, 7â9 compartment, memory 2â13, 8â10 connector(s) 1394 2â9 docking 2â14 drive 5â3 external monitor 2â9 infrared port 2â12, 7â13 modem 2â9, 7â3 network 2â9, 7â10 parallel 2â9 power 2â12 USB 2â9, 8â2 conservation, power 4â17 cord, power connecting 1â5 identifying 2â16 surge protection 1â14 See also cable country-specific modem adapter connecting 7â5 identifying 2â17 when to use 7â3 critical low-battery condition 4â13 345561-001.book Page 2 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ3 currency formats, setting 1â10 customer support 2â18, 9â14 D data compression algorithm 7â2 date, setting the 1â10 DC cable 1â8, 2â12 designation, drive 5â2 device drivers, reinstalling 9â11 dialing mode 7â7 dimensions, notebook Aâ1 disc, diskette. See drive media display release latch 2â2 display switch 2â5 function, changing 4â9 function, default 4â6 identifying 4â5 display, internal brightness 3â7 opening 1â4 switching image 3â6 docking connector, cover 2â14 drive designation 5â2 drive media affected by airport security 5â3 cancelling AutoPlay on 5â8 caring for 5â3 displaying contents of 5â8 inserting, removing CD or DVD 5â5 types and terms 5â2 drivers, reinstalling 9â11 drives adding to system 5â4 affected by airport security 5â3 avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using optical 5â9 IDE drive light 5â4 inserting, removing media 5â5 shipping 5â3 starting from 5â10 types and terms 5â2 USB 8â2 See also hard drive, internal DVD drive. See drives DVD(s) playing, with WinDVD 6â7 region settings 6â8 starting from 5â10 See also drive media E Easy CD Creator CD Copier, when to use 6â9 DirectCD, when to use 6â9 features 6â9 formats 6â11 obtaining 6â9 preparing to use 6â10 prompt, UDF 6â10 settings 6â12 source drive vs. destination drive 6â10 eject button optical drive 5â6 PC Card 8â6 electric shock warning 1â16 electrical storm, safety issues 1â14 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 5â3 , 8â11 345561-001.book Page 3 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ4 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x emergency shutdown procedures 1â10 , 4â6 enablers, PC Card 8â4 End User License Agreement 1â8 environmental specifications Aâ1 error message No Dial Tone 7â8 Playback Of Content From This Region Not Permitted 6â7 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 5â3 , 8â11 exhaust vent 2â10 external monitor connecting 8â2 connector 2â9 switching image 3â6 F fan, vents 2â10, 2â14 FCC notice 1â16 FDD (floppy disk drive) 5â2 flash memory card 8â7 flash RAM card 8â7 Fn key changing Standby function 4â9 hotkeys function 3â4 identifying 2â4 keypad functions 3â10 Standby function 4â5 video device function 6â6 function keys 2â4, 3â4 H hard drive bay identifying 2â13 replacing hard drive 5â10 hard drive, internal defined 5â2 displaying amount of free space on 8â10 replacing 5â10 retaining screws 5â11, 5â14 space on, required for Hibernation file 8â10 See also drives headphones 6â4 Help and Support window 3â6, 9â14 Hibernation avoiding when playing media 5â9 changing configuration during 4â2 controls and indicators 4â5 defined 4â2 identifying 5â10 initiated during critical low-battery condition 4â13 initiating 2â5, 4â8 resuming from 4â8 setting preferences 4â9 when to use 4â2 hotkeys changing function of Fn F5 4â9 identifying 3â4 procedures 3â6 Quick Reference 3â5 hotkeys commands access Help and Support 3â6 display brightness 3â7 initiate QuickLock 3â7 345561-001.book Page 4 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ5 initiate Standby 3â7 , 4â7 media commands 3â8 Open Internet Explorer 3â6 Quick Reference 3â5 switch image 3â6 hub, USB 8â2 humidity specifications Aâ1 I IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light 5â4 identifying components additional 2â16 display 2â2 IEC 60950 compliance 1â16 IEEE 802.11 compliance 1â13 infrared port 2â12, 7â13 International Telecommunications Union (ITU) 7â2 InterVideo WinDVD error message 6â7 managing region settings 6â8 playing video CDs and DVDs 6â7 ITU (International Telecommunications Union) 7â2 J jack audio-out 2â8, 6â4 microphone 2â8, 6â4 RJ-11 2â9, 7â3 RJ-45 2â9, 7â11 S-Video 2â8, 2â9, 6â5 Japan-specific modem adapter 2â17 K key applications 2â4 Fn 2â4 function (F1, F2, etc.) 2â4 hotkeys 3â4 keypad 2â4, 3â9 num lock 3â10 Windows logo 2â4 See also button(s); latch; switch, display keyboard language 1â10 L label Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 2â15, 9â10 modem approvals 2â15 product identification 2â15 system 2â15 wireless certification 2â15 language choosing during setup 1â8 selecting keyboard 1â10 latch battery pack locking 4â19 battery pack release 2â13 display release 2â2 See also button(s); switch, display light(s) battery 2â6 caps lock 2â6 hard drive 2â6 IDE drive 5â4 mute 2â6 345561-001.book Page 5 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ6 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x num lock 3â10 power/standby 2â6 wireless device 1â11, 2â6 line-out jack 2â8, 6â4 lock, security cable 8â16 locked system emergency shutdown procedures 1â10, 4â6 locking latches, battery pack 4â19 lock-up, system 2â5 low-battery conditions identifying 4â13 M Maintenance, Shipping and T ravel guide 2â18 media hotkeys 3â8 Media Player, Windows 6â7 media, drive affected by airport security 5â3 cancelling AutoPlay on 5â8 caring for 5â3 displaying contents of 5â8 inserting, removing CD or DVD 5â5 types and terms 5â2 See also drives memory compartment 2â13 displaying amount of 8â10 increasing RAM 8â10 module, removing or inserting 8â11 modules supported 8â10 microphone jack 2â8 microphone, connecting 6â4, 8â2 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 2â15 mode, dialing 7â7 model, identifying notebook 9â3 modem Ager e Command Set (Advanced Users Only) 2â18 approvals label 2â15 cable 2â16 connecting 7â3 country configurations 7â6 country-specific adapter 2â17 Modem Command Guidelines (Advanced Users Only) 2â18 specifications 7â2 speed 7â2 troubleshooting travel connections 7â7 virus protection 1â15 monitor, external connecting 8â2 external monitor connector 2â9 switching display 3â6 mouse, external connecting 8â2 USB connectors 2â9 multimedia card 8â7 N network cable 2â16 connecting 7â11 RJ-45 jack 2â9 specifications 7â10 speed 7â10 345561-001.book Page 6 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ7 No Dial Tone error message 7â8 Norton AntiVirus 2003 1â15 notebook model, family, type, and serial number 9â3 NTSC television format 6â6 num lock key 3â10 light 2â6 number Product Key 2â15 serial 2â15 numeric keypad 3â9 O opening the notebook 1â4 operating environment specifications Aâ1 operating system installing retail version of 9â12 loading 4â6 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 2â15 Product Key number 2â15 reinstalling 9â9 repairing 9â9 shutting down 4â6 optical disc. See CD(s); DVD(s) optical drive avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using 5â9 boot order 5â10 identifying 2â11 See also drives P PAL, PAL-M television formats 6â6 parallel connector 2â9 passwords 9â12 PC Card configuring 8â4 functions 8â4 inserting, removing 8â5 stopping 8â6 types available 8â4 PC Card eject button 2â11 pointing device 3â3 port, infrared 2â12, 7â13 power button 2â5 connecting the notebook to external 1â5 conservation 4â2, 4â17 controls 4â5 cord 2â16 emergency shutdown procedures 4â6 Hibernation procedures 4â6 low-battery conditions 4â13 power connector 2â12 power/standby light 2â6 rated input Aâ2 setting preferences 4â9 shutting down the notebook 1â10 Standby procedures 4â7 surge protection 1â14 345561-001.book Page 7 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ8 Startup and Re fer ence Gui de Inde x switching between AC and battery 4â11 turning on the notebook 1â7 See also battery pack power button function, changing 4â9 identifying 4â5 resetting with 4â6 power connector connecting 1â5 identifying 2â12 power cord connecting 1â5 surge protection 1â14 Power Meter 4â12 power, AC 1â16 power/standby light 4â5 Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) 7â12 preloaded utilities Bluetooth device 1â12 displaying descriptions 1â9 HP setup and configuration utility for wireless LAN devices 1â13 Product Key number 2â15 projector connecting 2â9, 8â2 switching display 3â6 PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment) 7â12 R RAM (Random Access Memory) 8â10 recovery CD 2â18 region settings currency, date, language, time 1â10 DVD 6â8 modem 7â6 Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide 2â18 regulatory information modem approvals label 2â15 notices 1â16 Re gulatory and Safety Notices guide 2â18 system label 2â15 wireless certification label 2â15 release latch battery pack 2â13 display 2â2 repairing the operating system 9â9 reset (emergency shutdown procedures) 1â10, 4â6 resolution, screen 1â10 restoring software 2â18 RJ-11 telephone jack connecting 7â3 identifying 2â9 modem cable 2â16 RJ-45 network jack connecting 7â11 identifying 2â9 network cable 2â16 345561-001.book Page 8 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ9 ROM defined 9â2 determining current version of 9â3 downloading and installing 9â5 obtaining updates 9â4 RomPaq, downloading 9â4 S Safety & Comfort Guide 1â16, 2â18 SD Card 8â7 security cable lock, connecting 8â16 slot 2â12 serial number, notebook 2â15 , 9â3 series, notebook 9â3 Setup utility 9â12 shutdown procedures 1â10, 4â6 sleep button 3â7, 4â9 Sleep. See Standby slot memory 8â10 PC Card 2â11 SD Card 8â7 security cable 2â12 socket services, PC Card 8â4 SoftPaq described 9â4 downloading and installing 9â7 software antivirus protection 1â15 AutoPlay 5â8 Easy CD Creator 6â9 Help and Support window 9â14 infrared 7â13 installing optional 1â9 modem 7â6 network 7â12 Norton AntiVirus 2003 1â15 Power Meter 4â12 regional settings 1â10 reinstalling 9â9, 9â11 repairing 9â9 restoring 2â18 RomPaq 9â4 Setup utility 9â12 SoftPaq 9â4 UDF Reader 6â10 updating preloaded software 9â2 Windows Media Player 6â7 WinDVD 6â7 software updates downloading and installing 9â5 , 9â7 obtaining 9â4 preparing for 9â3 speakers, external 6â4 speakers, internal 6â3 specifications dimensions Aâ1 modem 7â2 network 7â10 operating environment Aâ1 rated input power Aâ2 Standby avoiding when playing media 5â9 avoiding when using infrared 7â14 controls and indicators 4â5 345561-001.book Page 9 Mond ay, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ10 Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde x initiated during critical low-battery condition 4â13 initiating 3â7, 4â7 power/standby light 2â6 resuming from 4â7 setting preferences 4â9 S-Video connections 6â5 jack 2â9 switch, display 2â5 system label 2â15 system lock-up 1â10, 4â6 System Restore utility 9â8 T technical support 9â14 notebook documentation 2â18 telephone (RJ-11) jack connecting 7â3 identifying 2â9 modem cable 2â16 telephone numbers, service and support 9â14 television changing color format 6â6 connecting audio 6â4 connecting video 6â5 temperature notebook surface 1â16 specifications Aâ1 storage, battery pack 4â16 1394 connector 2â9 time, setting 1â10 TouchPad components 3â3 setting preferences 3â3 traveling with notebook battery pack temperature considerations 4â16 environmental specifications Aâ1 modem approvals label 2â15 serial number 2â15 wireless certification label 2â15 traveling with the notebook modem country configurations 7â6 regional settings 1â10 troubleshooting modem travel connections 7â7 T r oubleshooting guide 2â18 turning off notebook 1â10, 4â6 turning on notebook 1â7, 4â6 U UDF Reader 6â10 unresponsive system, emergency shutdown procedures 1â10, 4â6 USB connectors, identifying 2â9 devices, connecting 8â2 utilities, preloaded displaying descriptions 1â9 HP wireless setup and configuration 1â13 installing 1â9 See also software 345561-001.book Page 10 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde x Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde xâ11 V VCR audio-out jack function 6â4 connecting 6â5 vents, fan 2â10, 2â14 video CDs, DVDs. See CD(s); DVD(s) video device connecting audio 6â5 S-Video jack 6â5 turning on and off 6â6 viruses, computer 1â15 volume, adjusting 6â2 W WiFi certification 1â13 Windows applications key 2â4 Windows logo key 2â4 Windows Media Player accessing with Digital Audio button 6â7 using with audio CDs WinDVD error message 6â7 managing region settings 6â8 playing video CDs and DVDs 6â7 wireless device button 1â11 , 2â8 certification label 2â15 identifying 1â11 light 1â11, 2â6 setting up 1â11 WLAN products, Cisco Aironet 1â13 345561-001.book Page 11 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
Inde xâ12 Startup and R ef er ence Guide Inde x 345561-001.book Page 12 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
345561-001.book Page 13 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
345561-001.book Page 14 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
345561-001.book Page 15 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM
© 2003 He wlett-Packard De velopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indo ws are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. SD Logo is a trademark. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. St ar tup and R ef er ence Gui de HP Note book Ser ies F irs t E dition Sept ember 2003 R efe re nce Number : zt3000 Document P ar t Nu mber: 3 4 5 5 61-001 345561-001.book Page 16 Mo nday, July 14, 2003 11:19 AM